View
75
Download
4
Category
Preview:
Citation preview
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
June 2006
Contents
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage 30.0-1
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 1223
Mo
tor
Co
ntr
ol C
en
ters
— L
ow
Vo
ltag
e
Series 2100 Freedom
& AdvantageMotor Control Centers
General Description. . . . . . . . .
30.1-1
Characteristics
UL Labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-1
Replacement Units . . . . . . .
30.1-1
NEMA WiringClassifications . . . . . . . . .
30.1-1
Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-2
Wireways . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-2
Bus System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-3
Starter Units . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-5
dc Starter Units. . . . . . . . . .
30.1-6
Feeder Tap Units. . . . . . . . .
30.1-6
Stab Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-6
Handle Mechanism . . . . . .
30.1-6
Device Panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-7
Unit Wrapper . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-7
Unit Maintenance . . . . . . . .
30.1-8
Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . .
30.1-8
Unit Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-8
Additional Equipment . . . .
30.1-9
Control and Load Terminations. . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-9
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-10
PowerNet Monitoring and Communications . . .
30.1-10
DeviceNet Communications and Control. . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1-10
Harmonic Correction . . . . .
30.1-11
Additional Services . . . . . .
30.1-11
Layout Guide Index
. . . . . . . . .
30.1-12
Starter Sizing, Technical Dataand Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . .
30.1-13
Series 2100 Intelligent TechnologiesMotor Control Centers
General Description . . . . . . . . .
30.2-1
Characteristics
UL
Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-1
Replacement Units . . . . . . .
30.2-1
NEMA
Wiring Classifications
.
30.2-1
Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-2
Wireways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-2
Bus System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-3
Starter Units . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-5
Feeder Tap Units . . . . . . . . .
30.2-5
Stab Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-6
Handle Mechanism. . . . . . .
30.2-6
Device Panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-7
Unit Wrapper. . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-7
Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-7
Motor/Load Terminal Blocks
.
30.2-8
Unit Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-8
Additional Equipment. . . . .
30.2-8
Control and LoadTerminations . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-8
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-9
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-9
TVSS Surge Protection. . . .
30.2-9
Automatic Transfer Switches
.
30.2-9
Harmonic Correction . . . . .
30.2-10
Communications
DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-11
PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-12
Monitoring andDiagnostic Tools . . . . . . . .
30.2-12
Additional Services. . . . . . .
30.2-12
Layout Guide Index
. . . . . . . . .
30.2-14
Starter Sizing, Technical Data and Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . . .
30.2-15
Specifications
See Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Product Specification Guide on enclosed CD-ROM:1995 CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sections 16482A, 16482B
2004 CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sections 26 24 19.11, 26 24 19.13
Freedom and AdvantageMotor Control Center
Intelligent TechnologiesMotor Control Center
30.0-2
For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 1224
This page intentionally left blank.
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-1
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & Advantage
General Description
Sheet 1225
2100 SeriesMotor Control Center
Freedom and Advantage Motor Control Center
General Description
Introduction
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
T
Freedom
E
and Advantage
E
MCCs provide a convenient method for grouping motor control, as well as associated distribu-tion equipment. Both Freedom and Advantage 2100 Series MCCs may be applied on electrical systems up to 600 V, 50 or 60 Hz, having available fault currents of up to 100,000 amperes rms. Enclosure designs include NEMA
T
1 Gasketed, NEMA 2, 12 and 3R. All controllers are assembled with Cutler-Hammer components of proven safety, quality and reliability. All components are wired in accor-dance with NEC
T
and UL
T
standards.
Features
■
UL label.
■
42, 65 and 100 kAIC ratings.
■
Molded Case and Air Power Circuit Breakers.
■
Across-the-line, reduced voltage, and solid-state starters.
■
Variable frequency drives andVFD options.
Description
Motor Control Centers (MCCs) provide the best method for grouping motor control as well as associated distribution equipment. Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Freedom and Advantage 2100 Series Control Centers are specially designed to operate machinery, industrial processes and commercial building systems.
The MCC enclosure consists of a strong and rigid steel channel framework assembled into standardized vertical sections and bolted together to form a complete shipping section of up to 80-inch (2032.0 mm) maximum, four structures each. Structures include horizontal and vertical bus, insulation and isolation barriers, horizontal and vertical isolated wiring troughs, cable entrance areas and space for inserting starter and control equipment.
All control units, removable or fixed mounted, are assembled with Cutler-Hammer components of proven safety, quality and reliability. All components are wired in accordance with NEC and UL standards. Specifically designed bus stabs, insertion guides, handle mecha-nisms and safety interlocks are added to form a standardized plug-in unit which meets the highest safety standards.
Both Freedom and Advantage 2100 Series MCCs may be applied on elec-trical systems up to 600 V, 50 or 60 Hz having available fault currents of up to 100,000 amperes rms. Freedom dc Motor Control Centers are available up to 250 Vdc, having available fault currents up to 22,000 amperes rms. Enclosure designs include NEMA 1 Gasketed, 2, 12 and 3R. An ongoing temperature and short circuit design test program, as required by UL 845, ensures a quality product that meets the latest safety codes.
Replacement MCC Units
In addition to fully assembled, free-standing MCC lineups, replacement MCC plug-in units are available for:
■
Westinghouse 11-300, built from 1950.
■
Westinghouse Type W, built from 1965.
■
Westinghouse Five Star, built from 1975.
■
Westinghouse Series 2100, built since 1986.
■
Westinghouse Advantage, built since 1991.
■
Cutler-Hammer 9800, built from 1956.
■
Cutler-Hammer F10, built from 1972.
■
Cutler-Hammer Freedom, built since 1988.
■
Cutler-Hammer Freedom Series 2100, built since 1995.
A complete plug-in unit for adding to an existing MCC includes the plug-in unit, hinged door, isolating divider pan, and all necessary installation hardware.
Note:
Mounting hardware for old Cutler-Hammer MCCs is sold separately. Since MCC UL 845 standard was established in 1975, most standard replacement plug-in units will have UL labels.
Ordering Information
Replacement plug-in units should be ordered by description indicating:
■
Old General Order number/factory order number.
■
MCC model.
■
Type of plug-in unit.
■
Required features.
■
Circuit breaker or fuse rating.
■
Schematic reference, if any.
■
Motor data.
NEMA Classifications (ICS 3, Part 1)
Class I Control Centers
A mechanical grouping of combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other units arranged in a convenient assem-bly. Connections from the common horizontal power bus to the units are included. Interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices is not included. Only diagrams of the individual units are supplied.
When master terminal blocks are specified, a sketch showing general location of terminals is provided.
Class II Control Centers
The same as Class I, but designed to form a complete control system. They include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring between units and interlocking provisions to remotely mounted devices. A suitable diagram illustrating operation of the control associated with the motor control center will be provided.
When master terminal blocks are specified, the terminal arrangement and required wiring connections are shown on the diagram.
NEMA Types of Wiring
Type A
includes no terminal blocks. Combination line starters are factory wired and assembled in the structure in the most efficient arrangement. Auxiliary devices can be supplied, wired or unwired as specified. All feeder circuit breaker or fusible discon-nect units are in this classification.
Type B
duplicates Type A except that all control wires terminate at blocks on the
side or near the bottom of each unit. Load
terminals are all conveniently located adjacent to the control terminal blocks
on size 1 units only. Plug-in type terminal blocks are standard for all control wiring.
Type C-S
all factory supplied control terminals and load terminals for size 1 and 2 starters are brought to a master terminal block located in the structure.
Type C-M
all factory supplied control terminals and load terminals for size 1 and 2 starters are brought to a master terminal block located in a separate marshaling structure.
30.1-2
For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & Advantage
General Description
Sheet 1226
Structures
Standard Structure — Side View
Construction
The standard vertical structure is 90 inches (2286.0 mm) high and 20 inches (508.0 mm) wide. Front mounted only structures can be either 16 inches (406.4 mm) or 21 inches (533.4 mm) deep. Back-to-back unit mounting is 21 inches (533.4 mm) deep.
The structure framework is made of 12-gauge formed steel channels. The subframes for the front and rear of each structure are welded. These sub-frames are then bolted to longitudinal members to form the complete frame which is rigid and self-supporting. Side, back and roof covers of 14-gauge steel are mounted with screw fasteners for quick and easy removal. All doors are 14-gauge steel with a 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) flange to provide a rigid, secure closure for all openings. Doors mounted on removable pin hinges are provided on all unit compartments. Vertical wireways, top horizontal wireways and bottom horizontal wireways are standard.
The unit pan forms the top barrier of each unit space. In conjunction with the unit wrapper, this provides isolation between adjacent units and wireways. The guide rails are an integral part of this pan and provide precise alignment of the unit stabs on the vertical bus.
Standard Structure Arrangements
Standard structural height is 90 inches (2286.0 mm) with 9-inch (228.6 mm) horizontal wireways available at top and bottom for wiring. The balance of vertical compartments, 72 inches (1828.8 mm), is available for mounting of control units. This space can pro-vide up to 12 6-inch (152.4 mm) high (X spaces) or any combination thereof.
Note:
In the rear of common vertical bus back-to-back structures, the top horizontal wireway is 15 inches (381.0 mm) high and the bottom wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm). This means that back-to-back structures have only 66 inches (1676.4 mm) 11X of usable space in the rear. 72-inch (1828.8 mm) 12X of mounting space is available with a 3-inch (76.2 mm) bottom wireway. two front mounted only structures can be supplied in a back-to-back configuration, allowing 12X rear usable space (depth dimension will increase).
Special Structures
In addition to the standard 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure, extra wide structures are available in 4-inch (101.6 mm) increments up to 40 inches (1016.0) wide.
Reduced height structures, in incre-ments of 6 inches (152.4 mm) 1X from 90 to 54 inches (2286.0 to 1371.6 mm), are available for applications with limited access.
Another special structure is a transi-tion section between Type W and the Freedom 2100 Series. This structure is 10 inches (254.0 mm) wide to provide for horizontal bus splicing.
Paint
All enclosure parts are thoroughly cleaned and given a phosphatizing treatment to inhibit rust and to prime the metal for the finish coating. A 2 mil thick electrostatic powder paint coat is applied to all surfaces. The paint type and process meets UL 1332 for electri-cal equipment steel enclosures. All exterior enclosure covers and doors are painted ANSI 61 gray (Munsel No. 8.3G/6.10/0.54). For improved interior visibility, the interior of the enclosure and plug-in units are painted white (Munsel No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).
Enclosures
The standard enclosure type is NEMA Type 1 Gasketed General Purpose — Indoor. This enclosure is appropriate for installations with normal atmo-spheric conditions.
The NEMA Type 2 Dripproof — Indoor employs a special roof panel with a drip shield and water channels. This prevents liquid from dripping onto the front of the control center.
The NEMA Type 3R Rainproof and Sleet Resistant — Outdoor consists of a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure mounted on a special base with an outdoor house erected around and over it. Non-walk-in, walk-in aisle and tunnel types are available.
The NEMA Type 12 Dust-tight and Driptight — Indoor has gasketed material around all doors, door cutouts, cover plates, side, top, and back sheets. A gasketed bottom plate is provided with this enclosure. This construction provides maximum protection against airborne matter and dripping liquids.
Indoor enclosures comply with NEC UL 845’s “Two Meter Rule” when the bottom of the MCC is at the same level as the operator’s platform. MCC elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. Handle extensions are optionally available and may be installed on-site.
Vertical Wireway
A vertical wireway is provided in each structure. Located on the right side, it extends the full 90-inch (2286.0 mm) height of the structure. The width of the wireway is 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm) at the rear of the vertical frame mem-bers. Overall depth of the wireway is 8 inches (203.2 mm) providing a cross-sectional area of nearly 35 square inches (889 square mm) to easily accommo-date control and load wiring. Supports are provided at suitable intervals to secure all wiring and cables.
The doors swing open 115° and opposite to the unit doors for maxi-mum accessibility. The doors are mounted on concealed removable pin hinges for quick detachment and are secured in the closed position by spring-loaded quarter-turn indicating type fastener.
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-3
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & Advantage
General Description
Sheet 1227
Horizontal Wireways
Top Horizontal Wireway
Bottom Horizontal Wireway
The top front horizontal wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm) high and 8 inches (203.2 mm) deep in front mounted only structures and in the front of back-to-back mounted structures. It extends the full width of each structure and is totally isolated from the main horizontal bus. The bottom horizontal wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm) high and extends the full depth of the struc-ture. The entire floor area under the control center is open for unrestricted conduit entry. For top entry, the top wireway can be increased to 15 inches (381.0 mm) high, reducing the bottom wireway height to 3 inches (76.2 mm).
For back-to-back unit mounted, the rear top horizontal wireway is 15 inches (381.0 mm) high and 5 inches (127.0 mm) deep.
All horizontal wireway openings are covered by doors for increased accessibility. Each door is mounted with removable pin hinges to allow quick detachment.
Bus System
The bus system is designed to efficiently distribute power throughout the MCC and provides inherent mechanical strength in the event of faults.
Vertical Bus
Vertical Bus Configuration
The vertical bus provides 3-phase power distribution from the main horizontal bus into the vertical com-partments. The bus is a unique angu-lar configuration with an “L” shape for front mounted only structures and a “Z” shape for back-to-back. These shapes have the inherent mechanical strength to withstand fault stresses. They also provide a smooth stabbing surface for unit connection.
MCC Bus Layout
Due to the high strength capability of the bus bars, bus bracing at 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes is standard. Optional bracing is available at 42,000 amperes and 100,000 amperes rms. Bus braces are molded from a glass-reinforced polyester material which is non-tracking and impervious to mois-ture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions.
The vertical bus is available in ratings of 300, 600, 800 and 1200 amperes for front mounted only, and 600, 800 and
1200 amperes for back-to-back mounted.
Vertical bus bars are tin-plated copper only.
Vertical bus of the incoming section will match the horizontal bus when applicable.
Isolation of the Freedom Series 2100 vertical bus compartment from the unit compartment is accomplished by a full height barrier. This is a single sheet of glass-reinforced polyester with cutouts to allow the unit stabs to engage the vertical bus. Snap-in covers are available for the cutout openings to provide total isolation during maintenance procedures.
Standard Isolation Barrier
Standard Isolation Barrier Rear View
30.1-4
For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & Advantage
General Description
Sheet 1228
When insulation and isolation of the vertical bus is required, a
labyrinth design barrier
, as shown on the next page, is available. This barrier is molded glass-reinforced polyester and forms a labyrinth around the bus bars to prevent fault propagation. This design provides maximum protection against phase-to-phase insulation breakdown. Thermal efficiency is maintained by a close tolerance fit between the bus bars and the barrier which minimizes air pockets. The labyrinth barrier is standard for Advantage MCCs.
An automatic shutter mechanism is standard with the labyrinth barrier to provide complete isolation of the vertical bus. The shutter moves auto-matically to cover the stab openings when a unit is removed. This provides maintenance personnel with maxi-mum protection since the vertical bus is never exposed. As the unit is reinserted in the compartment, the shutter moves sideways to uncover the stab openings in the barrier.
Labyrinth Barrier with Automatic Shutter Mechanism
Horizontal Bus
Horizontal Bus
The main horizontal bus provides 3-phase power distribution from the incoming line or primary disconnect device to each vertical structure in the motor control center. The bus bars are mounted in a vertical plane, edge to edge. This mounting produces an exceptionally strong assembly, able to withstand high fault current stresses.
Standard horizontal bus bracing is 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical amperes. Optional bracing is available at 100,000 amperes rms. Bus braces are molded from high strength glass-reinforced polyester material which is non-tracking and impervious to mois-ture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions.
The main horizontal bus is rated at 600 amperes as standard with ratings of 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 amperes optionally available. Tin-plated copper bus bars are supplied as standard. Silver-plated copper is also available.
Note:
3200 ampere horizontal bus available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65°C rise above 40°C ambient only.
The horizontal main bus is isolated from the top horizontal wireway compartment by an isolation barrier. This two-piece steel barrier extends to the full width of each vertical structure. The two-piece design allows access to bus connections without the removal of the entire barrier, for added mainte-nance convenience. The bus bar layout permits front access to all bus con-nections. This allows maintenance personnel to make splices and check splice bolt torques from the front of the structure.
Neutral Assemblies
Neutral Bus (Bottom)
For 3-phase 4-wire applications, a neutral landing pad is provided as standard. This is a 100% rated neutral. As an option, half or fully rated neutral bus can be supplied in the bottom of the entire MCC.
Ground Bus
Ground Bus (Top)
Copper ground bus, rated 300 amperes 1/4-inch by 1-inch (6.4 mm by 25.4 mm) is supplied as standard. Mounting is across the top of each vertical structure in the horizontal wireway. The bus can also be mounted across the bottom when the bottom 9 inches (228.6 mm) are not occupied by units or master terminal blocks. A 1/4-inch by 2-inch (6.4 mm by 50.8 mm) copper ground bus rated 600 amperes is optional.
An optional 300 ampere vertical tin-plated
only copper ground bus is available. Located in the vertical wireway, it provides direct starter unit grounding.
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-5
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & Advantage
General Description
Sheet 1229
Units
General
Motor starter units are combination type employing a linestarter and a disconnect device of proven capability. The disconnect device can be a motor circuit protector, circuit breaker or fusible switch. Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type HMCP motor circuit protector is furnished as standard.
All starters through NEMA Size 5 are a drawout design except Size 5 electromechanical reduced voltage.
All dimensions and ratings in the following tables are based on NEMA B, 1800 RPM motors.
The HMCP and starter combination has a 65,000 rms symmetrical ampere short circuit current rating as standard at 480 V.
Starter units are available with optional 100,000 ampere short circuit current rating. Series C thermal-magnetic circuit breakers (65 kAIC, or optional 100 kAIC) for starter units are also available.
Freedom and Advantage starters meet or exceed IEC 947-4 Type II testing with R and J fuses. Additionally, Advantage is Type II listed with Cutler-Hammer motor circuit protector disconnects.
The fusible switch disconnect device is the Type K. It is a quick-make, quick-break, visible blade switch with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual element, rejection type, NEMA Class J or R fuses. Rejection fuse clips for Class RK-5 fuses are standard. Fuses are not included as standard.
Both breaker and fuse selection must take into consideration the total short circuit capacity of the system to which the control center is connected.
Typical starter units available include the following:
■
Full voltage, non-reversing.
■
Full voltage, reversing.
■
Two-speed, single winding and two winding.
■
Reduced voltage, autotransformer, closed transition.
■
Reduced voltage, wye delta.
■
Reduced voltage, part winding.
■
Reduced voltage, solid state.
■
Adjustable frequency drives.
Each starter includes a stainless steel corrosion-resistant safety ground clip that makes connection before the power stabs engage the vertical bus.
Units — Freedom Starter
Freedom — FVNR Starter
Freedom Series 2100 starter units are equipped with Cutler-Hammer Freedom starters and contactors NEMA Sizes 1 through 5. Size 6 and 7 starters are A200 type. These contac-tors have been successfully applied in thousands of the most demanding industrial applications. Overload pro-tection is provided by a 3-pole adjust-able ambient compensated, bi-metallic thermal overload relay. The overload relay also provides single-phase sensi-tivity and isolated alarm contact. An insulated hand reset button extends through the compartment door. Addi-tionally, motor running data and starter status/control are available through DeviceNet systems.
Units — Advantage Starter
Advantage — FVNR Starter
Advantage starter units are equipped with Cutler-Hammer Advantage starters NEMA sizes 1 through 6. Introduced in 1991, the Advantage starter has been successfully applied in the most demanding industrial applications. Utilizing a microprocessor control, the Advantage starter affords phase unbalance protection, ground fault protection, more accurate motor overload protection, discrete pickup and dropout voltages and inherent coil surge protection. Additionally, motor running data and starter status/control are available through PowerNet and DeviceNet communications systems.
Units — ac Drives
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Adjustable Frequency Drives
are available from .5 hp to 1100 hp for control of standard ac motors in processes that benefit from the ability to change motor speed. Use of Inverter Duty motors is recommended. Con-trollers are available to handle constant torque applications, such as conveyors and crushers, and variable torque applications, such as fans and pumps. Control schemes are available for volts/Hz, open loop vector and closed loop vector models. SVX9000 drive units include as standard: line reactors and a door mounted keypad. Units up to 150 hp VT have a standard output reactor for V/DT filtering. MVX drive units include as standard: a line reactor, viewing window for drive display, and an output filter. All drive structures are bus connected which allows for expan-sion of the MCC on both sides of the structure. A wide range of AFD features and options are available to meet the requirements of most applications. AFDs are available in NEMA 1A gasketed enclosures.
30.1-6
For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & Advantage
General Description
Sheet 1230
Units — Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
IT. SSRV Starter Unit
IT.
Solid-State Reduced Voltage (SSRV) Starters are designed to reduce the inrush current to a motor during starting and limit the amount of available start-ing torque, thus reducing mechanical wear and utility demand requirements. The amount of starting current is field adjustable to match the specific require-ments of all applications.
Eaton’s
IT.
SSRV Controllers are avail-able with a wide variety of standard features: Kick start, soft stop, phase loss and stall protection.
IT.
SSRV Starters are 30 – 70% smaller than competitive designs.
Typical applications include conveyors, compressors, machine tools, pumps and fans.
Units — dc Starters
dc Starter Unit
UL listed dc MCCs use combination circuit breaker dc starters suitable for motor starting duty only. Using Cutler-Hammer Type ME dc definite purpose contactors, all dc starters are suitable for up to 250 Vdc and have a 22 kA withstand rating. Class 135 starting resistors for reduced voltage starters are sized for 200% starting current. Typical applications include emergency lube oil pumps, emergency seal oil pumps and emergency turning gear motors.
Feeder Tap Units
Dual Feeder Tap Unit
Feeder tap units may contain either circuit breakers or fusible switches. Drawout breaker units include the fixed trip Type HFD, single or dual mounted in ratings through 150 amperes and the interchangeable trip Types HJD and HKD single mounted through 250 and 400 amperes respectively. Larger Series C circuit breakers with ratings to 2500 amperes are fixed mounted.
Fusible feeder tap units utilize the Cutler-Hammer Type K visible blade disconnect switch. Fused switches are mounted in drawout units through 400 amperes with 30 and 60 ampere ratings available in dual mountings. Fixed mounted switch ratings of 600 and 800 amperes are also available.
All switches are supplied with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual-element rejection type. Types of fuses include Class J, R or L.
Stab Assembly
Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
A tin-plated copper alloy stab incor-porates the ultimate in mechanical simplicity to provide precise control of contact pressure on the bus. This ensures a positive connection yet permits easy unit insertion and withdrawal. Self-aligning stabs are mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic insulation block which totally shrouds each stab and absolutely ensures positive alignment of the stabs with the vertical bus. The insulation block is also an integral part of the phase-to-phase isolation system. Power wiring
is welded to the stabs and is totally contained within the unit enclosure. This means the vertical bus compart-ment is completely free of wiring for maximum safety and reliability.
Stab assemblies are accurately matched to the electrical requirements of each individual unit and are provided in 60, 150, 300 or 400 ampere ratings (plug-in through Size 5).
Handle Mechanism
Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanism
The handle mechanism is designed to provide a high mechanical leverage so that little effort is required to operate any device.
The standard handle mechanism is a vertical motion type device with four positions: ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET. Only circuit breaker types have tripped and reset positions. It is securely mounted to the front of the unit and mechanically connected to the breaker or fusible switch, eliminating alignment problems. It provides a positive indica-tion of the breaker or switch position, even with the door open.
Unit Insertion Interlock
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-7
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & Advantage
General Description
Sheet 1231
The handle and exterior front panel are molded from the same plastic material as the device panel. A textured surface preserves the appearance. The ON position indicator is at the top and is a bright red. The OFF/RESET position is at the bottom and is bright green. The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is in the middle, between the ON and OFF position. All position indicator colors contrast with the black background and are highly visible even at considerable distances. The operating handle is designed for rugged duty and solid operator feel.
Padlocking Bar
The handle mechanism provides several safety features:
■
In the ON position, an interlock prevents the unit door from being opened. A door interlock defeater screw located above the handle is provided to enable authorized maintenance personnel access to the units when required.
■
With the unit door open and the operating handle in the ON position, an interlock slides into a slot in the divider pan above and prevents removal of the unit. This same inter-lock prevents insertion of the unit unless the handle mechanism is in the OFF position. The interlock also pre-vents the operating handle from being turned on with the unit door open.
■
To ensure that units are not energized accidentally or by unauthorized per-sonnel, the handle mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. Sufficient space is available for a maximum of three padlocks. Where critical processes are involved and to prevent unauthorized shutdown, the handle mechanism can be modified to enable padlocking in the ON position.
Device Panel
Standard Device Panel
Advantage Device Panel with ACM and Metering Module
The device panel can accommodate up to six 1-3/16-inch (30.2 mm) Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer 10250T type pilot devices such as oiltight pushbuttons, indicating lights, selector switches and miniature meters.
Molded into the panel is a knockout for each device location. This facilitates the future addition of devices to the panel.
The device panel is hinged on a horizontal pivot tube extending across the front of the unit. With the unit door open, loosening two captive retaining screws at the top of the panel and sliding it 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) left, per-mits it to swing down. This provides ready access to the rear of the panel and increased accessibility to the unit interior.
NameplatesUnit nameplates are engraved with 3/16-inch (4.8 mm) high white lettering on a black background (black lettering on a white background optional). They are heat and crack resistant to eliminate the need for replacement. Nameplates are mounted with stain-less steel self-tapping screws.
Unit Wrapper
Plug-in Unit Wrapper
The unit wrapper is fabricated of 14-gauge steel. After fabrication, it is cleaned and given a rust inhibiting phosphatizing treatment. The finish on a unit wrapper is a baked Munsel No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23 white. This is highly durable finish, gloss-white in color to increase visibility within the unit and facilitate wiring and maintenance procedures.
The unit wrapper consists of a three-sided rugged steel shell including the mounting base for the unit compo-nents. The smallest unit measures 13-3/4 inches (349.3 mm) wide, 8 inches (203.2 mm) deep and 6 inches (152.4 mm) high. Units increase in 6-inch (152.4 mm) increments to a maximum height of 72 inches (1828.8 mm).
The unit wrapper is designed to provide ample space for cable entry from the wireway to the unit.
30.1-8
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageGeneral Description
Sheet 1232
The unit wrapper has four mounting points, two on each side, which support the unit in the structure. They engage guide rails located near the top of each unit space. This mounting point guide rail system produces minimum friction and allows units to be inserted and withdrawn easily. The guide rails also give precise alignment to the unit for accurate stabbing on the vertical bus.
Unit Wrapper Latch
At the top center of the unit wrapper is a quarter-turn latch which securely holds the unit in the compartment. The latch can only be engaged when the stabs are fully mated with the vertical bus. Upon release of the latch, the unit can be partially withdrawn such that the stabs disengage from the vertical bus. In this position, the latch can be re-engaged to prevent the unit from being returned to the fully stabbed position or from being removed from the structure. The latch can be pad-locked in this position to ensure that the stabs remain disengaged during maintenance.
Unit Maintenance
Plug-in Unit Maintenance
The three-piece unit wrapper design facilitates easy work bench mainte-nance. When removed from the MCC, the unit top/side barrier assembly can easily be swiveled up and back for complete access to components and wiring.
Terminal BlocksA side mounted, seven-circuit, latching pull-apart terminal block is standard on units with NEMA Type B or C wiring. This industrial grade Cutler-Hammer MCC terminal block provides solid electrical connections while conserving space and making installation and maintenance easier.
Terminal blocks are mounted in knock-outs on the vertical wireway side of the unit housing affording greater access to the unit compartment and interior components. The two-piece terminal block snap-locks together to ensure permanent circuit continuity. To aid installation and wiring checks, the terminal marking strips for both sides of the terminal block are fully visible from the front of the starter compartment.
Side Mounted — Latched Pull-Apart Terminal Block
Heavy-duty saddle wire terminals are of the resilient collar design which eliminates loose connections caused by expansion and contracting of the conductor as the current is switched on and off. This unique design main-tains constant pressure as the wire expands and contracts. This 600 V, 30 A rated terminal block will accept 12 AWG stripped wires, as well as 14 AWG ring or spade wire lugs. All terminal block conductors are fully shielded for added safety and cleanliness.
A 12-inch (304.8 mm) high (2X space) starter unit accommodates up to three side-mounted terminal blocks provid-ing a maximum of 21 points. Larger units accommodate two additional 7-point terminal blocks for every additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) 1X space of unit height. The 6-inch (152.4 mm) compact starter unit uses a 9-point pull-apart terminal block which is installed along the top front of the starter unit.
Control wiring within each starter compartment consists of 16 AWG control wire for Freedom 2100 Series MCCs and 14 AWG wire for Advantage 2100 Series MCCs. Rated 105°C, the flame-retardant, thermoplastic insu-lated wire is red. Power wiring is black and sized to carry the maximum full load current of the starter unit.
Front Rail Mounted Terminal BlocksFor special applications, other types of rail mounted terminal blocks are also available. They are installed horizon-tally at the bottom front of the starter unit. Refer to Eaton for terminal block types available and space restrictions.
Unit Doors
12-Inch (304.8 mm) Unit Door
Unit doors are formed of 14-gauge steel with a 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) flange on all four sides. The flange adds rigid-ity to the door and provides a surface to contain door gasketing. Cutouts are made in the door as required to accom-modate the operating handle and device panel. The doors are cleaned, phosphatized and given a finish of gray, baked on enamel ANSI 61.
The doors will open 115° opposite to the wireway doors permitting optimum access to the unit compart-ment. The doors are mounted on removable concealed pin hinges. This permits quick removal of any door in a vertical structure without disturbing adjacent doors.
Doors 2X and larger are held closed with a minimum of two quarter-turn indicating type fasteners. They securely hold the door in the closed position, yet allow quick and easy access to the unit when required. The fasteners provide a visual indica-tion of the latched position. The head slot of the fastener is designed to prevent screwdriver slippage.
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-9June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageGeneral Description
Sheet 1233
Spring-Loaded Unit Door 1/4 Turn Latch
OptionsEaton’s Cutler-Hammer starter and feeder tap units can be modified to meet a variety of specification require-ments. Some typical components which can be added include: control power transformers with two primary and one secondary control fuses, con-trol relays, CEP7 or IQ 500 (solid-state overload) relays, ground fault relays, current transformers, extra electrical interlocks, pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, circuit breaker shunt trip or undervoltage release and auxiliary switches. In most cases, one of these modifications does not increase starter unit size.
Additional EquipmentIn addition to motor starter and feeder units, additional equipment can be supplied including the following:
■ Single-phase dry-type distribution transformers in ratings of .5, .75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 and 45 kVA.
■ 3-phase dry-type distribution trans-formers in ratings of 9, 15, 25, 30 and 45 kVA.
■ Lighting panelboards with up to 42 circuits with either plug-in branch breakers or bolt-on branch breakers, 120/240 V, 120/208 V or 480 V, single- or 3-phase.
■ Current limiting reactors with ohmic values of .01, .015, .02 and .025, and ampere ratings of 600, 800, 1000 and 1200.
■ Metering equipment including the IQ family of solid-state power monitors, voltmeters and ammeters.
■ PLC and DCS I/O racks.■ IT. family of solid-state reduced
voltage starters.
■ MVX and SV9000 adjustable frequency controllers.
■ Active Harmonic Correction Units.■ Transient Voltage Surge Suppres-
sion (TVSS) units.■ Size 4, 5 and 6 vacuum starters
and contactors.■ Power factor correction capacitors.■ Automatic transfer switches.■ DeviceNet Communications.■ PowerNet Communications.■ PanelMateT industrial Operator
Interface.■ Industrial PCs.
Control and Load Terminations
Master Terminal Blocks at Bottom (Class C Wiring)
For NEMA Type A wiring each unit is assembled and devices interwired. Terminal blocks are not supplied and control and load wiring is internal to the unit.
For NEMA Type B wiring, control wires are terminated at blocks within the unit. Refer to the discussion of units for types of terminal blocks available.
For NEMA Type C-S wiring, control, and size 1 and 2 starter load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located at the top or bottom of each vertical structure.
The mounting location of the master terminal block in front mounted only structures is in the existing horizontal wireway space at the top or at the bot-tom as shown above. When mounting is made in an incoming line section, 12 inches (304.8 mm) of unit space must be used. When mounting is made in the rear of back-to-back mounted structures, 6 inches (152.4 mm) of unit space must be used at the bottom and 12 inches (304.8 mm) at the top.
Master terminal blocks are rack mounted to permit removal of entire assembly for ease of wiring during installation and maintenance.
For NEMA Type C-M wiring control and size 1 and 2 starter load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located in a separate marshaling structure.
Incoming LineIncoming line cables entering the MCC from either the top or bottom can be easily terminated onto main lugs or connected to a main disconnect. All incoming line sections comply with NEC wiring bending require-ments as adopted by UL.
Main Lugs Only (MLO)Up to 1200 ampere rated horizontal bus, cables, up to four per phase, are termi-nated on crimp or screw lugs mounted on adapters solidly bolted to fully rated vertical bus. Top entry cables are terminated at the top of the MCC and bottom entry cables are conveniently terminated near the bottom. Table 30.1-83 shows spacing requirements for various cable configurations. MLO ter-mination for 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 amperes requires a full vertical section.
Note: 3200 ampere main lugs only available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65°C rise above 40°C ambient only.
Main DisconnectsIncoming cables may also be easily terminated on a main circuit breaker or fused switch. A variety of molded case or encased circuit breakers are available. Tables 30.1-60 through 30.1-66 show spacing requirements for various main devices.
30.1-10
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageGeneral Description
Sheet 1234
Metering
IQ Analyzer
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ family of metering and power monitors includes:
IQ 320 microprocessor-based 3-phase power monitor replaces the traditional ammeter, voltmeter and instrument switches. Displays phase currents, voltage, L-L, L-N, power-real and reac-tive apparent, power factor, frequency, energy: watthours, varhours, VA-hours.
IQ 200 includes all of the functions of the IQ 320 meter. The door mounted display is smaller, making the IQ 200 ideal for use on individual starter and drive units.
IQ DP-4000 includes all of the func-tions of the IQ 320 plus THD readings for voltage and current. Additionally, the IQ DP-4130 includes contact inputs and outputs. This device is ideal for incoming line monitoring.
IQ Analyzer provides extensive meter-ing, power quality analysis, remote input monitoring, control relaying, analog input/outputs, and is communi-cations capable. A display provides the flexibility of exhibiting large characters with high visibility and small charac-ters for detailed descriptions.
These IQ power monitors each contain their own voltage power pack for systems up to 600 V. Therefore, separate potential transformers are not required. Either two or three separate current transformers must be used. All IQ power monitors are communications capable. Refer to Section 3 for further details.
Power Xpert is a meter available with communication features for power management and system software integration in addition to a Web inter-face. Customers and facility personnel can view the metering data using a standard PC Web browser. The new platform offers advanced functionality like transient capture, high sampling rate, open communications, Web server gateway, field-upgradable firmware, expandable memory and optional I/O.
Communications — PowerNet
Central Monitoring Unit
The Advantage MCC is available with the PowerNet communications network. PowerNet network capable devices, such as Advantage starters, the IQ family of metering devices, addressable relays, energy sentinels and many others, can be connected together with one twisted pair PowerNet communications net-work. Advantage starters may be controlled and monitored from remote locations. 3-phase motor running cur-rent, control voltage, elapsed time, start count and overload status information is available on the network.
Central Monitoring Unit (CMU) For Advantage MCCs, a Central Monitoring Unit can be installed to provide central-ized motor monitoring for an entire MCC. Using a PowerNet communica-tions network, all Advantage starters with WPONI network modules are serially connected to the CMU via one shielded twisted pair network. At the CMU, motor running data as well as start/stop and overload status can be conveniently monitored.
Parameters Displayed■ Monitored values:
❑ Device description❑ IA, IB, IC currents❑ Control voltage❑ Present time, date❑ Resettable operation unit❑ Run time, hours
■ Trip data — current values and cause of trip.
■ Set points:❑ Device size❑ OL trip current setting (FLA setting)❑ OL trip class❑ Ground fault protection — ON/OFF❑ Phase loss/unbalance
protection — ON/OFF❑ Reset mode — Auto/Manual
Frequency
Communications — DeviceNet
DeviceNet Wiring
Advantage MCCs are available with DeviceNet Communications. DeviceNet is a device level open communication network linking DeviceNet capable control products, such as Advantage Starters, Freedom Starters, Adjustable Frequency Drives, PanelMate 1700 Series and operator interfaces, DN50 I/O blocks, IT. soft starters and iPCs. These products are prewired in the MCC with DeviceNet cable. Available control and monitor-ing features of Advantage Starters and SVX9000 drives include:
■ ON/OFF control.■ Control voltage.■ Trip reset.■ Trip indication.■ Cause of trip.■ Thermal capacity.■ 3-phase or average motor current.■ Various drive parameters.■ Overload warning.
Available control and monitoring features of Freedom Starters and IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters include:
■ ON/OFF control.■ Overload trip indication.■ RUN status.■ Disconnect status.
The DeviceNet specification is con-trolled by the Open Device Vendors Association (ODVA). The DeviceNet system can be controlled from:
■ iPC (industrial personal computer) PC-based control software.
■ DeviceNet scanner cards designed for leading PLC and DCS systems.
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-11June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageGeneral Description
Sheet 1235
Harmonic Correction
Figure 30.1-1. Clean Control Center Installation Diagram
The Clean Control Center utilizes a harmonic correction unit to provide harmonic cancellation directly on the Motor Control Center Horizontal Bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and injects into the ac lines a synthesized waveform that is inverted compared to the remaining signal. The result is a clean waveform as seen by the upstream electrical system. Single or multiple harmonic correction units may be applied within a Clean Control Center providing an economical solution to excessive har-monics due to ac drives or other non-linear loads. Use of the Clean Control Center will provide compliance to the most stringent 5% Total Demand Distortion (TDD) requirements of IEEE 519. Clean Control Center assemblies include a 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCC structure, Active Harmonic Cor-rection Unit, Current Transformers and a door-mounted digital interface panel.
PLCsProgrammable Controllers can be mounted in Freedom Series 2100 and Advantage MCCs in a wide variety of configurations. Popular mounting configurations include small PLCs unit mounted to replace relays, medium sized PLCs with I/O for control of an MCC lineup, and remote I/O drops mounted in an MCC and connected to the main CPU via coaxial cable. Dueto the flexibility of PLCs and the wide variety of applications and configura-tions, the Freedom Series 2100 and Advantage MCCs are designed to meet the mounting requirements of most applications.
Motor ProtectionThe Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer CEP7 Solid-State Overload Relay offers improved motor protection due to high repeat accuracy and fast reaction times to phase failures. The state-of-the-art microelectronics design permits the choice of relays with different trip classes (Class 10, 20) to accommodate motors with a variety of application needs.
The CEP7 and CEP7B Solid-State over-loads are available on all Freedom starter sizes. (Size 5 and up utilize CTs with the overload relay.) Key features include:
■ Phase loss■ Phase imbalance■ Wide adjustment range■ Low energy usage■ Reduced heat■ Jam/stall protection (CEP7B)■ Ground fault (CEP7B, opens
starter only)
The MP-3000 Motor Overload Relay is a microprocessor-based relay which provides superior motor protection for critical process motors. Standard pro-tective features provided in the MP-3000 include: I2t with programmable locked rotor protection, instantaneous overcur-rent, ground fault, underload, jam, phase loss/unbalance/reversal, limit starts/hr, alarm and trip modes and capability to utilize RTDs for motor protection. Functions are user programmed via a data entry and display panel mounted in the door of the Freedom Series 2100. Alarm and Trip contacts are provided for remote indication. In addition, the MP-3000 will have the capability for remote monitoring via a communica-tions port. The ultimate in motor protec-tion is available in the MP-3000 and the Series 2100 MCC.
Source
XFMR
Alternate CTPlacement
Typical CTPlacement
HarmonicCorrection
Unit
Load(s)
Additional Services
Startup AssistanceTo ensure complete customer satisfac-tion and to expedite equipment startup for Motor Control Centers, this service provides a factory-trained representa-tive at the job-site during equipment energization. This service is provided on a fixed price basis. In addition to factory directed startup, the standard equip-ment warranty is extended for a period of 24 months. This service is especially beneficial when solid-state equipment is incorporated within the MCC due to the flexibility in adjusting solid-state equipment for each application.
Maintenance and Operational TrainingA full range of Training and Operational Training programs are available for all types of MCC mounted equipment. In addition, Preventative Maintenance programs are available to ensure years of trouble-free operation.
Seismic QualificationSeismic testing has been completed for Freedom and Advantage MCCs. When specified, Freedom and Advan-tage MCCs are seismically qualified to meet the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC).
RetrofitsExisting installations can many times benefit from some of the “new” technology equipment available in today’s MCCs. Eaton offers a full range of retrofit capabilities to upgrade exist-ing MCC lineups. Examples include: vacuum contactors, reduced voltage solid-state starters, solid-state meter-ing and solid-state overload protec-tion. Starter retrofit kits for selective competitor MCCs are also available. Consult factory for availability.
30.1-12
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageGeneral Description
Sheet 1236
Freedom and Advantage Motor Control Center
2100 Series Motor Control Center
Quick Reference Layout Guide IndexDevice Space Requirements Table Page
Combination Starters, Series CT Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-2 30.1-13
Combination Starters, Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-16 30.1-18
MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-25 30.1-22
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-27 30.1-23
Option Groups for Combination Starters, Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-33 30.1-26
250 Vdc Combination Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-56 30.1-29
Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-60 30.1-30
Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-66 30.1-32
Lighting Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-67 30.1-32
Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-70 30.1-32
Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-71 30.1-33
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-72 30.1-33
Current Limiting Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-73 30.1-33
TVSS (Clipper Power System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-74 30.1-33
DeviceNet™ Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-75 30.1-33
Earth Leakage Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-76 30.1-34
Metering and Protection Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-78 30.1-34
Harmonic Correction — Clean Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-79 30.1-34
Standard Structures and Structure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-80 30.1-36
Structure Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-81 30.1-36
Bus Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-82 30.1-37
Main Lugs Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-83 30.1-37
Control Power Transformer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-85 30.1-38
MCC Ratings and Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-87 30.1-38
Motor Circuit Protector, Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-88 30.1-39
Starter Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-89 30.1-40
Section Views/Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — 30.1-40
Layout Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-90 30.1-45
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-13June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1237
Technical DataTable 30.1-1. Short Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480 Volts)
Table 30.1-2. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Motor Circuit Protector Ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efficiency) motors. Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
1 Standard Combination Starter Units with HMCP Magnetic Only disconnect have short circuit ratings of 65,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional HMCP combination starter units are available with 100,000 amperes at 480 volts.
2 Optional Combination Starter Units with Thermal-Magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 amperes or 100,000 amperes at 480 volts.
3 Maximum of (3) pilot devices, (2) auxiliary contacts; 100 VA CPT maximum. Standard lugs only.4 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard.5 18-inch (457.2 mm)/3X unit is standard.6 Minimum 30-inch (762.0 mm) space needed with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker.7 Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.8 Limited options. Two starter units share common door.9 30-inch (762.0 mm) space needed for Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker.j For top entry, 8X space required.k 1200 ampere HMCP frame available in 11X 66-inch (1676.4 mm).l Requires 36-inch (914.4 mm) wide structure.m Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.Note: For HMCP continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.1-88 on Page 30.1-39.
Short Circuit Protective Device
Combination StarterFV and RV (kA)
Solid-StateReduced Voltage (kA)
Adjustable Frequency Drives (kA)
HMCP Motor Circuit Protector (Standard Rating)HMCP Motor Circuit Protector (Optional Rating)
65100
65100
65100
MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Standard Rating)MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Optional Rating)Fusible Switch
65100100
65—100
65100100
NEMA Size
Maximum Horsepower HMCP Frame 1
MCCBFrame 2
Freedom Advantage
Unit Size Unit Size
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Type F206 Type W206
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 150HFD/FDCHFD/FDC
6 (152.4) 312 (304.8) 418 (457.2)
1X 3
2X 4
3X
6 (152.4) 312 (304.8) 418 (457.2)
1X 3
2X 4
3X
2 10 15 25 25 25 150HFD/FDCHFD/FDC
12 (304.8) 418 (457.2)
2X 4
3X
6 (152.4) 312 (304.8) 418 (457.2)
1X 3
2X 4
3X
3 25 30 50 50 50 150
HFD/FDCHFD/FDCHFD/FDC
18 (457.2) 524 (609.6)
3X 5
4X
12 (304.8) 318 (457.2) 524 (609.6)
2X 3
3X 5
4X
4 40 50 75 100 100 150
HFD/FDCHFD/FDCHJD/JDC
18 (457.2) 56
24 (609.6) 6 3X 5 4X
12 (304.8) 618 (457.2) 56
24 (609.6) 6
2X 3X 5 4X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 36 (914.4) 6X 36 (914.4) 6X
6 25150
100
200
250
300
300350400
400——
600 HLD/LDC k 48 (1219.2) 8X 42 (1066.8) 7X j
1200 HND 72 (1828.8) 7 12X 60 (1524.0) 10X
7 — 300 — 600 600 1200 HND 72 (1828.8) 7 12X 72 (1828.8) 7 12X
Full Voltage Non-Reversing — Dual Unit 8 Type F246 Type W2461 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 150 HFD/FDC 18 (457.2) 3X 18 (457.2) 3X
2 10 15 25 25 25 150 HFD/FDC 18 (457.2) 3X 18 (457.2) 3X
Full Voltage Reversing Type F216 Type W216
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 150 HFD/FDC
18 (457.2) 524 (609.6)
3X 5
4X18 (457.2) 524 (609.6)
3X 5
4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 150 HFD/FDC18 (457.2) 524 (609.6)
3X 5
4X18 (457.2) 524 (609.6)
3X 5
4X
3 25 30 50 50 50 150 HFD/FDC 24 (609.6) 9 4X 24 (609.6) 9 6X
4 40 50 75 100 100 150 HJD/JDC 30 (762.0) 9 5X 30 (762.0) 9 5X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 60 (1524.0) 10X 60 (1524.0)
10X
6125150
100200
250300
300400
400—
6001200
HLD/LDCHND l
72 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) l
12X12X l
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8) m
12X12X m
30.1-14
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1238
Table 30.1-2. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Continued)
1 Standard Combination Starter Units with HMCP Magnetic Only disconnect have short circuit ratings of 65,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional HMCP combination starter units are available with 100,000 amperes at 480 volts.
2 Optional Combination Starter Units with Thermal-Magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 amperes or 100,000 amperes at 480 volts.
3 Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed disconnect.4 42-inch (1066.8 mm) space needed with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker. 48-inch (1219.2 mm) space needed with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker.5 Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.6 36-inch (914.4 mm) space needed for Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker.7 Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.8 For starting speed disconnect, add 6-inch (152.4 mm) space.Note: For HMCP motor circuit protectors continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.1-88 on Page 30.1-39.
NEMA Size
Maximum Horsepower HMCPFrame 1
MCCBFrame 2
Freedom Advantage
Unit Size Unit Size
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
Two-Speed One Winding, Constant/Variable Torque Type F946 Type W9461 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 150 HFD/FDC 24 (609.6) 3 4X 24 (609.6) 3 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 150 HFD/FDC 24 (609.6) 3 4X 24 (609.6) 3 4X
3 25 30 50 50 50 150 HJD/JDC 36 (914.4) 34 6X 36 (914.4) 34 6X
4 40 50 75 100 100 150 HJD/JDC 36 (914.4) 34 6X 36 (914.4) 34 6X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 72 (1828.8) 5 12X 72 (1828.8) 5 12X
Two-Speed Two Winding, Constant/Variable Torque Type F956 Type W9561 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 150 HFD/FDC 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 3 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 150 HFD/FDC 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 3 4X
3 25 30 50 50 50 150 HFD/FDC 30 (762.0) 5X 30 (762.0) 3 5X
4 30 40
40 50
60 75
75100
100—
150 250
HFD/FDCHJD/JDC
30 (762.0)30 (762.0) 6
5X 5X
30 (762.0) 330 (762.0) 3
5X 5X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 72 (1828.8) 5 12X 72 (1828.8) 5 12X
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Type F606 Type W6062 10 15 25 25 25 150 HFD/FDC 36 (914.4) 6X 36 (914.4) 6X
3 25 30 50 50 50 150 HFD/FDC 48 (1219.2) 8X 54 (1371.6) 9X
4 30 50 75 100 100 150 HJD/JDC 54 (1371.6) 9X 54 (1371.6) 9X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X
6 150 200 300 400 400 600 HLD/LDC 72 (1828.8) 7 12X 72 (1828.8) 7 12X
7 — 300 — 600 600 1200 HND 72 (1828.8) 7 12X 72 (1828.8) 7 12X
Reduced Voltage Part Winding Type F706 Type W7061PW 10 10 15 15 15 150 HFD/FDC 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 8 4X
2PW 20 25 40 40 40 150 HFD/FDC 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 8 4X
3PW 40 50 75 75 75 150 HFD/FDC 30 (762.0) 5X 30 (762.0) 8 5X
4PW
— 60 75
— 60 75
—125150
100150—
125150—
150 250 400
HFD/FDCHJD/JDCHKD/KDC 36 (914.4) 8 6X 36 (914.4) 8 6X
5PW100150
125150
—250
250350
300350
400 600
HKD/KDCHLD/LDC 72 (1828.8) 7 12X 72 (1828.8) 7 12X
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open Transition Type F806 Type W8062YD 20 25 40 40 40 150 HFD/FDC 30 (762.0) 5X 30 (762.0) 5X
3YD 30 40
40 50
75—
75—
5—
150 250
HFD/FDCHJD/JDC 42 (1066.8) 7X 42 (1066.8) 7X
4YD 60—
75—
125150
150—
150—
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 48 (1219.2) 8X 42 (1066.8) 7X
5YD100150
125150
200250
250300
300—
400 600
HKD/KDCHLD/LDC 72 (1828.8) 7 12X 72 (1828.8) 7 12X
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed Transition Type F896 Type W8962YD 20 25 40 40 40 150 HFD/FDC 42 (1066.8) 7X 42 (1066.8) 7X
3YD 40 50 — — — 250 HFD/FDC 54 (1371.6) 9X 54 (1371.6) 9X
4YD 60—
75—
125150
150—
150—
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 60 (1524.0) 10X 60 (1524.0) 10X
5YD100150
125150
200250
250300
300—
400 600
HKD/KDCHLD/LDC 72 (1828.8) 7 12X 72 (1828.8) 7 12X
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-15June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1239
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Start Controller — S701Eaton’s solid-state reduced voltage soft start controller uses a manual motor protector, main disconnect in conjunction with the soft start controller. Units can be supplied with one controller or with four or six controllers fed from one main disconnect.
Table 30.1-3. Soft Start Controller — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — HMCP — S752Eaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. soft starter has three 24 Vdc inputs and one transistor output. IT. soft starter units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Table 30.1-4. Standard Duty Ratings — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Table 30.1-5. Severe Duty Ratings — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Table 30.1-6. Control Options
1 Bypass starter or isolation contactor options will fit in (3X) 18-inch (457.2 mm) units.
Table 30.1-7. Group-Mounted Controller Option
AmpereRating
Maximum Horsepower HMCPValues
Unit SizeInches (mm)208 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
3.51525
135
135
2 7.515
21020
73050
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower HMCPValues208 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
4.4 9162750
54 0.75 2 3 7.515
1 2 3 7.515
2 5102030
3 7.5102540
715305070
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower HMCPValues208 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
4.4 9162750
54 0.75 2 2 3 7.5
1 2 2 510
2 5 51020
3 7.5 7.51530
715305070
Extra 50 VA Control Power TransformerLine or Load MOV ProtectionBypass StarterIsolation Contractor
MaximumHorsepower perUnit at 480 V
Numberof Units
Unit SizeInches (mm)
227.57.5
4646
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)24 (609.6)36 (914.4)
30.1-16
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1240
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — HMCPEaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection■ A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load
amperes.■ A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load
amperes. (15% more current.)■ IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger
IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
Table 30.1-8. Standard Duty Ratings — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
1 Standard duty ampere rating. See rating chart below.2 Consult factory for width of unit.3 Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 30.1-9. Option Sizing — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4 Option fits in standard unit space.Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
Table 30.1-10. Control Options
5 Option fits in standard unit space.6 Option adds 6 inches (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
Table 30.1-11. Standard Duty Ratings
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower or (kW) HMCP/MCCBFrame
Unit SizeInches(mm)
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
HMCP 1
37 66
65 10 15
10 20
10 20
10 20
15 30
18.5 30
20 40
25 50
30 50
30 60
100 100
12 (304.8)
105 135 135
110 30 40—
30 40—
30 40—
40 50—
45— 55
55— 75
60 75—
75100—
75100—
100 125—
150 150 250
18 (457.2)
180 180 240 304 304
200 — 50 60 75—
— 60 75100—
60— 75100—
60— 75100—
— 75110
132
— 90132
160
—125150200—
—150200250—
150—200250—
150— 200 300—
250 400 400 400 600
36 (914.4)
360 420 500
290 125150—
125150—
125—150
150—200
160200250
200220 250
—300350
—350400
300350450
350 450 500
600 600 600
54 (1371.6)
650 720 850
290 200200—
200250—
200250300
250300350
315—375
375—500
450500600
500600700
600600700
600 700 900
120012001200
72 (1828.8)
1000 290 — — 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 2000 72 (1828.8) 23
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect 1
37 66
65 10 15
10 20
10 20
10 20
15 30
18.5 30
20 40
25 50
30 50
30 60
150 150
12 (304.8)
105 135
110 30 40
30 40
30 40
40 50
45 55
55 75
60 75
75100
75100
100 125
150 225
18 (457.2)
180 180 240 304 304
200 — 50 60 75—
— 60 75100—
— 60 75100—
— 60 75100—
— 75110132—
— 90132160—
—125150—200
—150200—250
150—200—250
150— 200— 300
250 250 400 400 600
36 (914.4)
360 420 500
290 125150—
125150—
125—150
150—200
160200250
200220250
—300350
—350400
300350450
350 450 500
600 600 600
72 (1828.8)
650 650 720 850
290 200—200—
200—250—
—200250300
—250300350
—315—375
—375—500
450—500600
500—600700
600—600700
600— 700 900
800120012001200
72 (1828.8)
1000 290 — — 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 2000 72 (1828.8) 23
IT. Width(mm)
DisconnectType
StarterSize
Option UnitSize 4
StructureWidth
Isolating Contactor 65110110
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
1,2,33,45
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
20 (508.0)32 (812.8)48 (1219.2)
Bypass Starter 65110110
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
1,2,33,45
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
24 (609.6)32 (812.8)48 (1219.2)
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 56
24 Vdc Control 5Line or Load MOV Protection 5Pump Control Option 5DeviceNet Communications Module 56
Ramp Current % of FLA
RampTime
StartsPer Hour
Similar toStarting Method
300%500%350%
30 Seconds10 Seconds20 Seconds
333
Soft StartFull VoltageWye Delta
480%390%300%
20 Seconds20 Seconds20 Seconds
234
80% RVAT65% RVAT50% RVAT
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-17June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1241
IT06 — Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — HMCPEaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection■ A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load
amperes.■ A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load
amperes. (15% more current.)■ IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger
IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
Table 30.1-12. Severe Duty Ratings — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
1 Severe duty ampere rating. See rating chart below.2 Consult factory for width of unit.3 Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.9 mm) wide (rear is unusable).Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 30.1-13. Option Sizing — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4 Option fits in standard unit space.Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
Table 30.1-14. Control Options
5 Option fits in standard unit space.6 Option adds 6 inches (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
Table 30.1-15. Severe Duty Ratings
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower or (kW) HMCP/MCCBFrame
Unit SizeInches(mm)
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
HMCP 1
22 42
65 5 10
5 10
5 10
7.5 15
7.5 18.5
11 22
10 25
15 30
15 30
20 40
100 100
12 (304.8)
65 80 80
110 15— 20
20— 25
20— 25
20— 30
22 37—
30 37—
40— 50
50— 60
50— 60
60— 75
100 100 150
18 (457.2)
115150150192192
200 30— 40— 50
40— 50— 60
30 50—— 60
40 50—— 75
55— 55 90—
55— 75 90—
75100——125
75100——125
100—125—150
100—150—200
150 150 250 250 400
36 (914.4)
240305365420480
290 60 75100125—
75100125150—
—100125—150
—100150—200
110132160200220
132160200220250
150200250300350
200250300350400
—250300350450
—300350450500
400 400 600 600 600
54 (1371.6)
525 290 — — — — — — 350 450 — — 600 72 (1828.8)600 — — — — — — 450 500 500 600 1200 72 (1828.8) 23
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect 1
22 42
65 5 10
5 10
5 10
7.5 15
7.5 18.5
11 22
10 25
15 30
15 30
20 40
150 150
12 (304.8)
65 80
110 15 20
20 25
20 25
20 30
22 37
30 37
40 50
50 60
50 60
60 75
225 225
18 (457.2)
115150192
200 30 40 50
40 50 60
30 50 60
40 50 75
55 55 90
55 75 90
75100125
75100150
100125150
100150200
400 400 400
36 (914.4)
240305
290 60 75
75100
—100
—100
110132
132160
150200
200250
—250
—300
600 800
54 (1371.6)
365420480525
290 100125——
125150——
125—150—
150—200—
160200220—
200220250—
250300350350
300350400450
300350450—
350450500—
1200120012001200
72 (1828.8)
600 290 — — — — — — 450 500 500 600 1200 72 (1828.8) 23
IT. Width(mm)
DisconnectType
StarterSize
Option UnitSize 4
StructureWidth
Isolating Contactor 65110110
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
1,2,33,45
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
20 (508.0)32 (812.8)48 (1219.2)
Bypass Starter 65110110
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
1,2,33,45
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
24 (609.6)32 (812.8)48 (1219.2)
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 56
24 Vdc Control 5Line or Load MOV Protection 5Pump Control Option 5DeviceNet Communications Module 56
Ramp Current %of FLA
RampTime
StartsPer Hour
Similar toStarting Method
450%500%350%
30 Seconds10 Seconds65 Seconds
410 3
Soft StartFull VoltageWye Delta
480%390%300%
25 Seconds40 Seconds60 Seconds
4 4 4
80% RVAT65% RVAT50% RVAT
30.1-18
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1242
Table 30.1-16. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short circuit current.2 Maximum of (3) pilot devices, (2) auxiliary contacts; 100 VA CPT, standard lugs only.3 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard.4 Certain items in unit option Groups B and C may require additional space. See Page 30.1-27.5 For bottom entry of motor cables.6 For top entry of motor cables.7 Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.8 Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed fuses.9 Add 12-inch (304.8 mm) space for low speed fuses.j Bottom 24-inch (609.6 mm) space in rear is unusable.k Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.Note: For fusible continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.1-88 on Page 30.1-39.
NEMASize
Maximum Horsepower Switch Rating 1
Freedom Advantage
Unit Size Unit Size
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
Full Voltage Non-Reversing — Fusible Type F204 Type W204
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30
6 (152.4) 212 (304.8) 318 (457.2)
1X 2X 3
3X
6 (152.4) 212 (304.8) 318 (457.2)
1X 2X 3
3X
2 10
15 25 25 25
60
12 (304.8) 318 (457.2)
2X 3
3X12 (304.8) 318 (457.2)
2X 3
3X
3 25 30 50 50 50 100 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
4 40 50 75 100 100 200 36 (914.4) 6X 36 (914.4) 6X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 4 60 (1524.0) 10X 54 (1371.6) 9X
6 150 200 300 400 400 60066 (1676.4) 572 (1828.0) 6
11X12X 60 (1524.0) 10X
Full Voltage Reversing — Fusible Type F214 Type W2141 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
3 25 30 50 50 50 100 30 (762.0) 5X 30 (762.0) 5X
4 40 50 75 100 100 200 54 (1371.6) 9X 48 (1219.2) 8X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72 (1828.0) 7 12X 72 (1828.0) 7 12X
6 150 200 300 400 400 600 72 (1828.0) 7 12X 72 (1828.0) 7 12X
Two-Speed One Winding — Fusible Type F944 Type W9441 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
3 25 25
30 30
— 50
30 50
50 50
60100 36 (914.4) 6X 36 (914.4) 6X
4 — 40
— 50
— 75
—100
60100
100200 60 (1524.0) 10X 54 (1371.6) 9X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72 (1828.0) 7 12X 72 (1828.0) 7 12X
Two-Speed Two Winding — Fusible Type F954 Type W9541 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 30 (762.0) 5X 24 (609.6) 4X
3
— 25
— 30
— 50
— 50
30 50
60100 30 (762.0) 5X 30 (762.0) 5X
— 25
— 30
— 50
— 50
30 50
60100 36 (914.4) 8 6X 36 (914.4)
6X
4— 40
— 50
— 75
—100
60100
100200 54 (1371.6) 9 9X 48 (1219.2)
8X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72 (1828.0) 7 12X 72 (1828.0) 7 12X
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer — Fusible Type F604 Type W6042 10 15 25 25 25 60 36 (914.4) 6X 36 (914.4) 6X
3 25 30 50 50 50 100 60 (1524.0) 10X 54 (1371.6) 8X
4 40 50 75 100 100 200 72 (1828.0) j 12X 72 (1828.0) j 12X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72 (1828.0) 7 12X 72 (1828.0) 7 12X
6 150 200 300 400 400 600 72 (1828.0) k 12X 72 (1828.0) k 12X
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-19June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1243
Table 30.1-16. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches (Continued)
1 Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short circuit current.2 Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.3 Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep section.Note: For fusible continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.1-88 on Page 30.1-39.
NEMA Size
Maximum Horsepower Switch Rating 1
Freedom Advantage
Unit Size Unit Size
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
Reduced Voltage Part Winding — Fusible Type F704 Type W7041PW 10 10 15 15 15 60 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
2PW— 20
15 25
25 40
30 40
40—
60 100
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X 4X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X 4X
3PW— 40
— 50
— 75
50 75
6075
100 200
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)
8X 8X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)
8X 8X
4PW 50 75
— 75
100150
100150
150—
200 400
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)
9X 9X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)
8X 8X
5PW100150
100150
200250
250350
300350
400 600 72 (1828.8) 2 12X 2 72 (1828.8) 2 12X 2
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open Transition — Fusible Type F804 Type W804
2YD 15 20
15 25
30 40
40—
40—
60 100 36 (914.4) 6X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
6X 6X
3YD 25 40
30 50
50 75
60 75
75—
100 200 54 (1371.6) 9X 54 (1371.6) 9X
4YD 50 60
60 75
100150
125150
150—
200 400 72 (1828.8) 2 12X 2
60 (1524.0)72 (1828.8) 2
10X12X 2
5YD100150
125150
200250
250300
300—
400 600 72 (1828.8) 2 12X 2 72 (1828.8) 2 12X 2
6YD
——250300
—200250350
—350400500
—400500700
350500700700
400 600 8001200
72 (1828.8) 3 12X 3 72 (1828.8) 3 12X 3
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed Transition — Fusible Type F894 Type W894
2YD 15 20
15 25
30 40
40—
40—
60 100 48 (1219.2)
8X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)
8X 8X
3YD 25 40
30 50
50 75
60 75
75—
100 200 66 (1676.4) 11X 66 (1676.4) 11X
4YD 50 60
60 75
100150
125150
50—
200 400
72 (1828.8) 272 (1828.8) 2
12X 2
12X 272 (1828.8) 272 (1828.8) 2
12X 2
12X 2
5YD100150
125150
200250
250300
300—
400 600 72 (1828.8) 2 12X 2 72 (1828.8) 2 12X 2
6YD
——250300
—200250350
—350400500
—400500700
350500700700
400 600 8001200
72 (1828.8) 3 12X 3 72 (1828.8) 3 12X 3
30.1-20
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1244
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — Fusible SwitchEaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection■ A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load
amperes.■ A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load
amperes. (15% more current.)■ IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger
IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
Table 30.1-17. Standard Duty Ratings — Fusible 1
1 Standard duty ampere rating. See rating chart below.2 Consult factory for unit width.3 Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 30.1-18. Control Options
4 Option fits in standard unit space.
Table 30.1-19. Standard Duty Ratings
Table 30.1-20. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
5 Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower (kW) SwitchRating
Unit SizeInches(mm)
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
37 66
65 10 15
10 20
10 20
10 20
15 30
18.5 30
20 40
25 50
30 50
30 60
30/60 100
18 (457.2)
105 135
110 30 40
30 40
30 40
40 50
45 55
55 75
60 75
75100
75100
100 125
200 200
30 (762.0)
180 240 304 304
200 50 60— 75
60 75—100
60 75100—
60 75100—
75110—132
90132—160
125150—200
150200—250
150200—250
150 200— 300
400 400 400 600
60 (1524.0)
360 420 420 500
290 125—150—
100—125—
125——150
150——200
160200—250
200220—250
——300350
——350400
300—350450
350— 450 500
600 600 800 800
72 (1828.8)
650 720 850
290 200200—
200250—
200250300
250300350
315—375
375—500
450500600
500600700
600600700
600 700 900
120012001200
72 (1828.8)
1000 290 — — 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 1200 72 (1828.8) 23
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 424 Vdc Control 4Line or Load MOV Protection 4Pump Control Option 4DeviceNet Communications Module 4
Ramp Current %of FLA
RampTime
StartsPer Hour
Similar toStarting Method
300%500%350%
30 Seconds10 Seconds20 Seconds
333
Soft StartFull VoltageWye Delta
480%390%300%
20 Seconds20 Seconds20 Seconds
234
80% RVAT65% RVAT50% RVAT
IT. Width(mm)
Fused Switch Type (Amperes)
StarterSize
Option Unit Size Inches (mm) 5
Structure WidthInches (mm)
65110110
30/60/100100200
1,2,334
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
400/800600/800800/1200
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
32 (812.8)36 (914.4)64 (1625.6)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-21June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1245
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — FusibleEaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection■ A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load
amperes.■ A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load
amperes. (15% more current.)■ IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger
IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
Table 30.1-21. Severe Duty Ratings — Fusible 1
1 Severe duty ampere rating. See rating chart below.2 Consult factory for width of unit.3 Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 30.1-22. Control Options
4 Option fits in standard unit space.
Table 30.1-23. Severe Duty Ratings
Table 30.1-24. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
5 Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower (kW) Switch Rating
Unit SizeInches(mm)
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 575 V
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
22 42 42
65 5 10—
5 10—
5— 10
7.5— 15
7.5— 18.5
11— 22
10— 25
15— 30
15— 30
20— 40
30/6030/60 100
18 (457.2)
65 80
110 15 20
20 25
20 25
20 30
22 37
30 37
40 50
50 60
50 60
60 75
200 200
30 (762.0)
115115150192
200 — 30 40 50
— 40 50 60
— 30 50 60
— 40 50 75
— 55 55 90
— 55 75 90
75100—125
75100—150
100—125150
100—150200
200 400 400 400
60 (1524.0)
240305365420480480525
290 60 75100125———
75100125150———
—100125——150—
—100150——200—
110132160200220——
132160200220250——
150200250300—350350
200250300350—400450
—250300350—450—
—300350450—500—
600 600 800 800 80012001200
72 (1828.8)
600 290 — — — — — — 450 500 500 600 1200 72 (1828.8) 23
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 424 Vdc Control 4Line or Load MOV Protection 4Pump Control Option 4DeviceNet Communications Module 4
Ramp Current %of FLA
RampTime
StartsPer Hour
Similar toStarting Method
450%500%350%
30 Seconds10 Seconds65 Seconds
410 3
Soft StartFull VoltageWye Delta
480%390%300%
25 Seconds40 Seconds60 Seconds
4 4 4
80% RVAT65% RVAT50% RVAT
IT. Width(mm)
Fused Switch Type(Amperes)
StarterSize
Option Unit SizeInches (mm) 5
StructureWidth Inches (mm)
65110110
30/60/100100200
1,2,334
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
400/800600/800800/1200
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
32 (812.8)36 (914.4)64 (1625.6)
30.1-22
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1246
MVX Adjustable Frequency DrivesMaximum motor lead length is 500 feet (152 m). Drives are dual rated CT and VT with 150% Overload for 1 minute. Standard unit includes disconnect, 1% line reactor, 50 VA CPT, a 1.5% output reactor, and provisions for a control relay. Output reactor is not required if using an inverter duty motor.
■ All Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer MVX units are plug-in for 20-inch (508 mm) wide structures.
■ Maximum motor lead length is 500 feet (152 m).■ Firmly connect each drive chassis to an earthed ground. Grounding conduit
does not provide adequate grounding.■ Use separate conduit for output power conductors and digital and analog
control signals. Within the MCC, care should be taken in routing power and control wiring.
Table 30.1-25. MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 3% line reactors are included in standard unit.Note: 3% line reactors should be used where Power Factor Correction Capacitors are an integral part of the MCC Line Power.
Table 30.1-26. MVX Options — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
MaximumHorsepower
MaximumAmperes
CB Type
Standard Unit Space 1
Typical Option Space
Maximum Option Space
HMCP MCCB Inches(mm)
X Inches(mm)
X Inches(mm)
X
208/240 Volt Application 0.5 1.0 2.0
2.5 5.0 7.0
151515
151515
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
3.0 5.0 7.5
10.017.025.0
303050
203050
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)
5X5X5X
460 Volt Application (+/- 10%) 1.0 2.0 3.0
3.0 4.0 5.0
7 7 7
151515
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
5.0 7.510.0
8.213.018.0
153030
152535
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)
5X5X5X
Description Space Required
Inches (mm) X
Manual Bypass3% Load Reactor5% Load Reactor
12 (304.8) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4)
2X1X1X
Oversized CPT 100 VA1 Ampere Power Supply
6 (152.4) 6 (152.4)
1X1X
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-23June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1247
SVX9000 1 – 30 hp at 480 V Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive UnitsAll Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, an ac choke, output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. All plug-in units have a built-in Dynamic Braking Circuit, M3 frame. Standard unit drives do not include a CPT.
Note: Output reactor not included on 240 V units. Standard on 380 – 500 V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute.
VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute.
Table 30.1-27. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 For fusible disconnect use typical option unit.Note: Drive units fit into a standard 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide MCC structure.
CT/VTAmperes
Nominalhp CT/VTor (kW)
CB Type1
StandardUnit Space
Typical OptionsUnit Space
Max. Option Unit Space
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim. 1 (X) Dim. (X)
200 – 240 Volts 3.6 4.7 5.6 7
.75 1 1.5 2
7 15 15 15
15 15 15 15
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X3X
30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)
5X5X5X5X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
6X6X6X6X
10162230
3 5 7.510
15 30 50 50
25 40 50 70
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)36 (914.4)
4X4X4X7X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)48 (1219.2)
6X6X6X8X
42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)54 (1371.6)
7X7X7X9X
4357
1520
100100
100125
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
7X7X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)
8X8X
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)
9X9X
380 – 500 Volts 2.5 3 3.5 5
1 1.5 2 3
7 7 7 15
15 15 15 15
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X3X
30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)
5X5X5X5X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
6X6X6X6X
8111521
5 7.51015
15 30 30 30
15 25 35 50
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X4X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
6X6X6X6X
42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)
7X7X7X7X
273440
202530
50 50100
60 80100
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
6X6X6X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)
8X8X8X
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)
9X9X9X
Table 30.1-28. Plug-in Options
2 Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 32 for detailed informa-tion.
3 All options will fit in typical and maximum option unit.
4 This option will fit in all units.5 One of these options will fit in 5 – 30 hp CT
at 480 V frame standard units, 1 – 30 hp CT at 480 V typical and maximum option units.
6 All options will fit in maximum option unit.7 Use with bypass option.8 DB resistors are to be mounted by the
customer external to the MCC.i Not available for 240 V units.j RWT is mounted at the motor. See
Section 35 for Reflected Wave Trap (RWT).Note: Output reactor or DV/DT filter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) — 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT filter is used at the motor.Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard output reactor.Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT filter.
Plug-in Options
Option Boards 2
I/O Expander 3
Encoder ExpanderInterbus S CommunicationsModbus CommunicationsPROFIBUST DP Communications
3
3
3
3
LonWorks CommunicationsCan Open (Slave) CommunicationsDeviceNet Communications
3
3
4
Johnson ControlsT N2 CommunicationsPROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector)Modbus (D9 Connector)
3
3
3
Plug-in Control Relays1 Relay2 Relays3 Relays
5
5
6
Other OptionsAutomatic Bypass CircuitBypass Drive Test Switch7 Relay 120 V Control with CPTIsolated Signal Processor3-15 PSIG Interface
7
7
5
3
3
Dynamic Breaking ResistorsGraphics Keypad
8
4
Line Fuses 35
RFI Filter 4
Deduct to Remove Output Filter i
KLC 2000 ft. (610 m) DV/DT Filter 6
Output Contactor 3
Dual Overloads 36
3 Contactor Bypass 36
RWT FilterNEMA 1NEMA 4X and Class 1, Division 2
j
j
30.1-24
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1248
SVX9000 30 – 200 hp at 480 V Non-Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive UnitsAll Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. Standard units of 9X unit space must be located in the bottom of the MCC and there is no vertical bus in the lower 48 inches (1219.2 mm). There is no vertical bus for 12X units.Note: Output reactor not included on 200 – 240 V units. Standard on 380 – 690 V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute.VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute.
Table 30.1-29. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Drives with Fusible disconnects require drive with option space.2 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide, 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.3 32-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure built-in panel.4 40-inch wide (1016.0 mm), 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.
CT Amperes
Nominal hp or CT(kW)
VT Amperes
Nominal hp or VT(kW)
CB Type1
Standard Unit Space
Drive OptionSpace
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim. (X)
200 – 240 Volts— 70 83113
— 25 30 40
70 83113139
25 30 40 50
100100100150
125175200150
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)72 (1828.8)
9X 9X 9X12X
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8) 3
12X12X12X12X
139165200
50 60 75
165200264
60 75100
———
———
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8) 2
12X12X12X
72 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 4
12X12X12X
380 – 500 Volts, 50/60 Hz— 52 65 77
— 40 50 60
52 65 77 96
40 50 60 75
100100100150
125150175225
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)
9X 9X 9X 9X
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
12X12X12X12X
96125160180
75100125150
125160180—
100125150—
150250400—
300400500—
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8) 2
12X12X12X12X
72 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 4
12X12X12X12X
—260
—200
250320
200250
400400
600700
72 (1828.8) 272 (1828.8) 2
12X12X
72 (1828.8) 472 (1828.8) 4
12X12X
Table 30.1-30. Non-Plug-in Options
5 Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 32 for detailed informa-tion.
6 This option will fit in all units.7 All options will fit in option unit.8 Use with bypass option.i DB resistors are to be mounted by the
customer external to the MCC.j Not available for 240 V units.k RWT is mounted at the motor.Note: Output reactor or DV/DT filter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) — 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT filter is used at the motor.Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard out-put reactor.Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT filter.Note: Fusible units take option unit space. Not all options will fit in fusible units.
Non Plug-in Options
Option Boards 5
I/O Expander 6
Encoder ExpanderInterbus S CommunicationsModbus CommunicationsPROFIBUS DP Communications
6
6
6
6
LonWorks CommunicationsCan Open (slave) CommunicationsDeviceNet Communications
6
6
6
Johnson Controls N2 CommunicationsPROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector)Modbus (D9 Connector)
7
7
7
Plug-in Control Relays1 Relay2 Relays3 Relays
6
6
6
Other OptionsAutomatic Bypass Circuit Bypass Drive Test Switch7 Relay 120 V Control with CPTIsolated Signal Processor3-15 PSIG Interface
8
8
6
7
7
Dynamic Breaking ResistorsGraphics Keypad
i
6
Line Fuses 7
RFI Filter 7
Deduct to Remove Output Filter j
KLC 1000 ft. (305 m) DV/DT Filter 6
Output Contactor 7
Dual Overloads 7
3 Contactor Bypass 7
Dynamic Breaking Circuit 6
RWT FilterNEMA 1NEMA 4X and Class 1, Division 2
k
k
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-25June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1249
SVX9000 200 – 1100 hp at 480 V Multi-Structure Adjustable Frequency Drive UnitsAll Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, and a door-mounted keypad. Disconnect and drive unit are in separate structures, structures are mechanically interlocked. Structures have no vertical bus. These drives are bottom exit only.CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute.VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute.
Table 30.1-31. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Drives with fusible disconnects require drive with option space.2 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is
in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.3 80-inch (2032.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is
in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure.4 68-inch (1727.2 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 48-inch (1219.2 mm) wide structure and disconnect is
in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.5 Contact factory for sizing.6 100-inch (2540.0 mm) wide unit. 80-inch (2032.0 mm) drive is in (2) 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide
structures, disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.7 116-inch (2946.4 mm) wide unit. 96-inch (2438.4 mm) drive is in (2) 48-inch (1219.2 mm) wide
structures, disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
CTAmperes
Nominal hp or CT(kW)
VTAmperes
Nominalhp or VT(kW)
CB Type1
StandardUnit Space
DriveOption Space
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim. (X)
380 – 550 Volts 320 400 480 600
250 300 400 500
400 460 600 672
300 400 500 600
400 600 6001200
800 80012001600
72 (1828.8) 272 (1828.8) 272 (1828.8) 472 (1828.8) 4
12X12X12X12X
72 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 35
5
12X12X12X12X
700 88010201070
600 700 800 900
880102010701200
700 800 9001000
1200120012001600
1600200020002000
72 (1828.8) 672 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 7
12X12X12X12X
5
———
12X———
12001300
10001100
——
——
16001600
25002500
72 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 7
12X12X
——
——
Table 30.1-32. Multi-Structure Options
8 Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 32 for detailed informa-tion.
9 This option will fit in all units.j All options will fit in Option unit.k Use with bypass option.l DB resistors are to be mounted by the
customer external to the MCC.m DV/DT filter not available 700 hp and above.n Consult factory for sizing and availability.o RWT is mounted at the motor. See
Section 35 for Reflected Wave Trap (RWT).Note: Output reactor or DV/DT filter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) — 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT filter is used at the motor.Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard out-put reactor.Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT filter.Note: Fusible units take option unit space. Not all options will fit in fusible units.
Plug-in Options
Option Boards 8
I/O Expander 9
Encoder ExpanderInterbus S CommunicationsModbus CommunicationsPROFIBUST DP Communications
9
9
9
9
LonWorks CommunicationsCan Open (Slave) CommunicationsDeviceNet Communications
9
9
9
Johnson Controls N2 CommunicationsPROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector)Modbus (D9 Connector)
j
j
j
Plug-in Control Relays1 Relay2 Relays3 Relays
9
9
9
Other OptionsAutomatic Bypass CircuitBypass Drive Test Switch7 Relay 120 V Control with CPTIsolated Signal Processor3-15 PSIG Interface
k
k
k
j
j
Dynamic Breaking ResistorsGraphics Keypad
l
9
Line Fuses 9j
RFI Filter j
Deduct to Remove Output Filter i
KLC 2000 ft. (610 m) DV/DT Filter jm
Output Contactor jn
3 Contactor Bypass jn
Dynamic Breaking Circuit 9
RWT FilterNEMA 1NEMA 4X and Class 1, Division 2
o
o
30.1-26
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1250
Option Groups for ac Combination Starters, ac Drives
Option Group ATable 30.1-33. Wiring Class
1 Control Terminal Blocks and Device Panels not included with NEMA 1A wiring.
Table 30.1-34. 100 kA Circuit Breaker Starter Interrupting Capacity
2 Current Limiter Attachments are used. Add 6 inches (152.4 mm) to all size 3 and 4 starters.
Table 30.1-35. Control Circuit Transformers — Typical Sizing 3
3 Refer to Table 30.1-85 for actual ratings.Note: Price includes 1 secondary and 2 primary fuses.
Table 30.1-36. Control Circuit Fusing
Note: Required in accordance with NEC for all starter units with control wiring external to the MCC. See NEC, General for exceptions.
Table 30.1-37. Motor Starter Auxiliary Contacts
4 Maximum of 4 per contactor on multi-contactor starters and 6-inch (152.4 mm) units.
Table 30.1-38. Interlock for Switch or Breaker Operator
Note: For use when control circuit is fed from an external source.
Table 30.1-39. Internal Circuit Breaker Options
Table 30.1-40. Terminal Blocks
5 Use Burndy YAEV10-L36 for #10 AWG compression termination.
Table 30.1-41. Control Wire Options
6 Freedom Starter control terminals only available with spade wire terminals.
Table 30.1-42. Miscellaneous Options
7 May add 6 inches (152.4 mm) to unit size. Consult factory.8 May add 6 inches (152.4 mm). Consult factory.
Table 30.1-43. Vacuum Contactors in Lieu of Air Break
Table 30.1-44. Ground Fault Protection — Instantaneous or Adjustable
Description
NEMA Class IA 1NEMA Class IC
NEMA Class IIBNEMA Class IICNEMA Class IS (Includes 1B wiring and 2B schematics)
Starter Type Voltage
Starters with HMCPsStarters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
480 480
Starters with HMCPs Starters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
600 2600 2
Starter Size
1, 2 (100 VA) — Includes extra 50 VA3, 4 (150 VA) — Includes extra 50 VA5, 6 (250 VA) — Includes extra 50 VA
Extra 50 VA, Size 1, 2Extra 100 VA, Size 3, 4Extra 150 VA, Size 5, 6
Description
Control Fuse and Auxiliary SwitchControl FuseBlown Fuse Indicator
Description
1NO or 1NC (Sizes 1 – 4)1NO or 1NC (Sizes 5 – 6)
Maximum of eight on each contactor 4Maximum of four on each contactor
Description
1NO – 1NC2NO – 2NC
Description
Alarm Contact Auxiliary 1NO – 1NCAuxiliary 2NO – 2NC120 Volts Shunt Trip 50ºC (Thermal Magnetic)
Description
Side Mounted 5 (Will accept stripped wire or ring/spade wire lug –12 AWG bare/14 AWG ring/spade)
Front Rail – Pressure ConnectorFront Rail – Pull ApartFront Rail – Utility/Accepts ring wire lug.
Additional 6-inch (152.4 mm)space required for FreedomStarters Sizes 1 – 4
Description
#16 AWG (standard)#14 AWGWire Markers
Spade Wire TerminalsRing Wire Terminals 6Wiring to Common CPT
SIS Power Wire – SubstitutionSIS Control Wire – SubstitutionStarter Class 2 Interwiring/Per Wire
Description
Mini Ammeter and CT 7Mini VoltmeterMini Elapsed Time Meter
Panel Elapsed Time Meter 8Operations CounterWiring Diagram on DoorCoil Surge Suppressor
CT for Remote Metering (Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space)Heater Packs InstalledDevice LabelsBlank Device Panels
Starter Type
FVNRFVR, 2S2W, PWRVAT, 2S1W, YD-OpenYD-Closed
Available Sizes 4 – 6
Description
Earth Leakage Breakers Sizes 1 – 4Earth Leakage Breakers Size 5D64 Relay (with zero sequence CT)
All require additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-27June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1251
Table 30.1-45. Power Fuses — R, J Type
Table 30.1-46. Power Factor Capacitor Options
Table 30.1-47. Current Limiter Attachment for HMCP
Option Group BDevices may require extra unit space.
Table 30.1-48. Timing Relays
Table 30.1-49. Control Relays
1 The 6- and 8-pole units can be provided with 4 additional non-convertible NO contacts.
Table 30.1-50. Alternators
Option Group CDevices may require extra unit space.
Table 30.1-51. Monitoring Relays
2 Loop powered devices — requires 24 Vdc power source which is typically provided in the PLC.
3 Does not require separate 24 Vdc power source. Suitable for powering analog meters.
Table 30.1-52. Extra Bi-Metallic Overload Relay — Type C306
Option Group DDevices may require extra unit space.
Table 30.1-53. Solid-State Overload Relays
4 Requires thermal-magnetic disconnect.5 Includes LAM, JAM, ULM functions with 2 dry contacts.6 Requires a 120 V source.7 Size 4 starters require an additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) (1X) space
when used with CEP7 Solid-State Overload.
Ampere Rating
30 60100
OptionalOptionalOptional
200400600
OptionalOptionalOptional
Description
Blown Power Fuse Indicator (Set of 3-1 Per Phase)
Description
Size 1-2Size 3Size 4
—Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) spaceRequires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space
Type of Relay Mounting
Solid-State TimerPneumatic — AGASTAT
PanelPanel On or Off Delay
24 Hour Motor Timer7 Day TimerRepeat Cycle Timer
PanelPanelDoor or Panel
Number of Poles Type
2-Pole 4-Pole
General Purpose Type D7 Socket RelayN300 Fixed Contacts
2-Pole 4-Pole 6-Pole 8-Pole10-Pole
Type AR Machine Tool RelaysN600 Convertible Contacts
2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 6-Pole 1
8-Pole 1
Type M — D26 RelaysN600 Convertible Contacts
Description
2-Circuit Alternator3-Circuit Alternator
Panel (Additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space required on size 1s and size 2s)
Type of Relay
D60LA Current Sensing Voltage Transducer
—Price Includes 1 PT
Additional6-inch (152.4 mm)space required
ac CurrentSensors with CTs 2
0 – 5 Thru 0 – 100 A0 – 50 Thru 0 – 300 A0 – 300 Thru 0 – 600 A
ac Current Transducer, 4 – 20 mA, Self-powered with CTs 3
All Ratings
Phase Monitoring Relay — 3-Phase Watt Transducer, 4 – 20 mA, Self-powered CTs 3
Description
Size 1 — 32 Amperes Overload RelaySize 2 — 75 Amperes Overload RelaySize 3 — 100 Amperes Overload RelaySize 4 — 144 Amperes Overload Relay
Description
CEP7 Solid-State OverloadCEP7B Advanced Solid-State OverloadMP-3000 Motor ProtectorMP-3000 RTD ModuleIQ 500 Relay 4IQ 500M Load Protection 456
30.1-28
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1252
Option Group ETable 30.1-54. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
1 Maximum 2 devices per starter in dual units.2 Maximum of 6 devices without increasing compartment space.
Option Group F
Options for 6-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Units■ Control terminal blocks are 300 volt rated and are limited
to 12 points maximum.■ Standard VA control transformer only.
Table 30.1-55. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
3 On 6-inch (152.4 mm) starter units, pilot devices are limited to (3) E22 devices.
Device Device Type
Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit
10250T 12
Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder
Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb
Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit
E30 12
Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder
Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb
Device Device Type
Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit
E22 3
Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder
Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-29June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1253
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer dc Motor Control Center UL listed dc MCCs use combination circuit breaker dc starters suitable for motor starting duty only. Using Cutler-Hammer Type ME dc definite purpose contactors, all dc starters are suitable for up to 250 Vdc and have a 22 kA withstand rating. Class 135 starting resistors for reduced voltage starters are sized for 200% starting current. Typical applications include emergency lube oil pumps, emergency seal oil pumps and emergency turning gear motors.
Table 30.1-56. Cutler-Hammer dc Motor Control Center — HCMP or Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker
1 Not available in NEMA 3R enclosures.2 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure required. Rear is unusable.
Table 30.1-57. Cutler-Hammer dc Motor Control Center — Model K Fused Switch (RK5 Fuses not Included)
3 Fused switch units are not UL listed.4 Not available in NEMA 3R enclosures.5 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure required. Rear is unusable.
Table 30.1-58. Options
6 Add 2X space.
Table 30.1-59. Standards
dc StartersHMCP or Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker
Interr-uptingCapacity
hp MCCB UnitSize 1
Inches (mm)
X Space125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Size 122 kAIC
3 5 150 30 (762.0) 5X
Full Voltage Reversing Size 1 36 (914.4) 6X
Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 2 5 10 30 (762.0) 2 5X
Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 3 10 20 42 (1066.8) 2 7X
Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 4 20 40 250 48 (1219.2) 2 8X
dc Starters 3
Model K Fused Switch (RK5 Fuses not Included)
hp SwitchSize(Amperes)
Unit 4
Size Inches (mm)
XSpace125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Size 1 3 5 30 36 (914.4) 6X
Full Voltage Reversing Size 1 42 (1066.8) 7X
Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 2 5 10 60 48 (1219.2) 5 8X
Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 3 10 20 100 60 (1524.0) 5 10X
Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 4 20 40 200 72 (1828.8) 5 12X
400% Starting Torque ResistorsAmmeter and dc Shunt. Starter MountedAmmeter and dc Shunt. Incoming Line 6Negative Side Line ContactorNegative Overload RelayShunt Field Discharge Resistor
200% Starting Torque ResistorsMME dc ContactorsPositive Side Contactor and Overload Relay OnlyBus Systems for dc Motor Control Centers are 2-phase. The B-phase Bus Bar is RemovedReduced Voltage Starters include NEMA Class 135 Edgewound Power ResistorsMCC Plug-in Combination dc StartersUL 845 Listed
30.1-30
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1254
Table 30.1-60. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers — Molded Case Circuit Breakers — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Frames reflect standard circuit breakers. Unit spacings shown include sufficient space to terminate cables on any standard breaker lug. If cable sizes exceed those listed, add 12-inch (304.8 mm) space for lug adapters.
1 For 100% rated application, please refer to Page 21.4-61 Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers.2 T = top, B = bottom.3 100% Rated when 90° cable is applied at 75°C ampacity for 100% rating. RMS 310 LS is required and included in the price.4 Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) for top entry of incoming cables.5 Install at top or cable top entry or at bottom for bottom cable entry.6 NEMA 1 gasketed only.7 Digitrip RMS 310 LS is standard and included in the pricing.8 The main breaker requires the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.9 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide.j Install at top of vertical section for top entry cable and at bottom for bottom entry.
Table 30.1-61. Dual Feeder Units — Molded Case Circuit Breakers — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size(Amperes)
Circuit BreakerFrame 1
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Main Unit Size Feeder Unit Size Maximum Cable SizeSee circuit breaker terminaldata for variations.
240 V 480 V 575 V Inches (mm) 2 X Space Inches (mm) X Space
150 HFDFDC
100100
65100
2535
18 (457.2) T, B 3X 12 (304.8) 2X 4/0 (1 per Phase)
225 HFDFDC
100100
65100
3535
18 (457.2) T, B 3X 18 (457.2) 3X 4/0 (1 per Phase)
250 HJDJDC
100100
65100
3535
30 (762.0) T, B 5X 18 (457.2) 3X 350 kcmil (1 per Phase)
400 HKDKDC
100100
65100
2550
30 (762.0) T, B 5X 18 (457.2) 4X 250 kcmil (2 per Phase) or500 kcmil (1 per Phase)
CHKD 3CKDC 3
100100
65100
2550
30 (762.0) T, B 5X 30 (762.0) 5X 250 kcmil (2 per Phase) or500 kcmil (1 per Phase)
600 HLDLDC
100100
65100
3550
24 (609.6) B 45
30 (762.0) T 4X 5X
30 (762.0) j 5X 500 kcmil (2 per Phase)
CHLD 36
CLDC 36100100
65100
3550
24 (609.6) B 45
30 (762.0) T 4X 5X
24 (609.6) j 4X 500 kcmil (2 per Phase)
800 HMDL 100 65 35 30 (762.0) T, B 5 5X 30 (762.0) j 5X 750 kcmil (3 per Phase)
CHMDL 36 100 65 35 48 (1219.2) T, B 5 8X 48 (1219.2) j 8X 750 kcmil (3 per Phase)
NDC 100 100 50 42 (1066.8) T, B 5 7X 42 (1066.8) j 7X 750 kcmil (3 per Phase)
CHND 3CNDC 3
100100
65100
3550
72 (1828.8) T, B 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 750 kcmil (3 per Phase)
1200 HND 7NDC 7
100100
65100
3550
42 (1066.8) T, B 5 7X 42 (1066.8) j 7X 750 kcmil (3 per Phase)
CHND 36
CNDC 36100100
65100
3550
72 (1828.8) T, B 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 750 kcmil (3 per Phase)
2000 RD 7RDC 7CRD 3CRDC 3
100100100100
65100 65100
50655065
72 (1828.8) 8 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 750 kcmil (6 per Phase)
2500 RDRDC
100100
65100
5065
72 (1828.8) 89 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 750 kcmil (6 per Phase)
MaximumAmperes
Circuit BreakerFrame
Interrupting Ratings (kAIC) Enclosure WidthInches (mm)
Main Unit Size Feeder Unit Size Maximum Cable Size240 V 480 V 600 V Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
50/50 HFDFDC
100200
65100
2535
Standard20 (508.0)
N/A 12 (304.8) 2X See above breakerframe information
50/100 HFDFDC
100200
65100
2535
12 (304.8) 2X
100/100 HFDFDC
100200
65100
2535
12 (304.8) 2X
100/100 HFDFDC
100200
65100
2535
12 (304.8) 2X
150/150 HFDFDC
100200
65100
2535
12 (304.8) 2X
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-31June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1255
Table 30.1-62. Main Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Air Circuit BreakersManually or Electrically Operated — Fixed Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: A 4-inch (101.6 mm) filler section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
Table 30.1-63. Main Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated — Drawout Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 A 4-inch (101.6 mm) filler section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCCto allow for door opening.
2 Structure is rear aligned.
Table 30.1-64. Digitrip Units
3 Tie breaker adds an additional 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide bus transition section. Also (2) 4-inch (101.6 mm) filler sections will be added to the MCC if the tie breaker is located in the center of the MCC lineup. If the tie breaker is located between the two main structures the (2) 4-inch (101.6 mm) fillers are not needed.
FrameSizeAmperes
CircuitBreakerType
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) UnitSize
EnclosureWidth
EnclosureDepth240 V 480 V 575 V
800 MDS-608MDS-C08
65100
65100
65100
72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4)
1600 MDS-616MDS-C16
65100
65100
65100
2000 MDS-620MDS-C20
65100
65100
65100
3200 MDS-632MDS-C32
65100
65100
65100
42 (1066.8)
FrameSize(Amperes)
CircuitBreakerType
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Unit Size
EnclosureWidth
Enclosure Depth240 V 480 V 575 V
800 MDS-608MDS-C08
65100
65100
65100
72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6) 1 42 (1066.8) 2
1600 MDS-616MDS-C16
65100
65100
65100
2000 MDS-620MDS-C20
65100
65100
65100
3200 MDS-632MDS-C32
65100
65100
65100
Type Unit SpaceInches (mm)
RMS 310 – 1150 Refer to Page 21.4-10 for more details. —
OptionsTie Breaker 3Electrically Operated
72 (1828.8) or 12X—
AccessoriesUV Release-InstantaneousShunt Trip (standard on electrically operated breakers)Key Interlock on breaker
———
Auxiliary Switch (3A/3B)Cell Position SwitchOperations Counter
———
Auxiliary Power Module (to test Digitrip)Portable Lift TruckManual Close Pushbutton Cover
———
Table 30.1-65. Main-Tie-Main Auto-Throw Over Options
4 Panelmate page layouts are pre-defined, and not subject to customer modifications.
Option Description
AT200 Standard PLC-based control scheme. No operator interface (PanelMate) provided. Sequence of operations and external controls are pre-defined and not subject to customer modifications. Type of voltage sensing device must be chosen. If closed-transition opera-tion is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
AT300 Same as AT200, except includes operator interface (PanelMate). 4
AT300X Same as AT200, except customer modifications are acceptable. This is the proper choice for PLC-based systems with special sequences, more than main-tie-main configura-tions, and/or where special Panel-Mate page layouts are required.
AT300IQ Standard IQ Transfer-based control scheme for main-main configura-tions. Either or both sources may be generators. Includes manual-auto operation, and generator control switch. If closed-transition opera-tion is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
30.1-32
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1256
Table 30.1-66. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches —Dimensions in Inches (mm)3-Pole — 250 V or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
1 Suitable for 100,000 A interrupting if Class RK fuses are used.2 Type of SW K-SW 30 – 800 amperes.3 For bottom cable entry, add 6 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.4 For bottom entry, add 12 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space.5 For top entry, add 6 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.6 High magnetic molded case switch.
Table 30.1-67. Lighting Panelboards 120/240 V or 120/208 V Lighting Panelboards Type — PL1AFixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire; 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire.
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Bolt-on 1-, 2-, 3-pole breakers only.
Table 30.1-68. 277/480 V or 480/600 V Lighting Panelboards Type — PRL3AFixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 480 or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire or 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire. Mounted in bottom portion of structure.
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Either plug-in or bolt-on 1-, 2-, 3-pole breakers only.
Table 30.1-69. Lighting Panelboard Circuit BreakersEaton’s Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers can be either plug-in or bolt-on, 1-, 2- or 3-pole through 240 V. 600 V maximum 1-, 2- or 3-pole circuit breakers are bolt-on.
Table 30.1-70. Automatic Transfer Switches — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7 ATVI designs include IQ Transfer door mounted microprocessor-based monitoring device for use in open transition transfer switches where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situations is essential. The IQ Transfer is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be used with Cutler-Hammer transfer switches. This device provides the opera-tor with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the power source currently in use. The IQ Transfer continuously monitors either single-phase or 3-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the Load. Depending on the application, the user can customize the IQ Transfer to meet specific application need.
8 Manually operated switch: MTVX = Single handle manual operation.NTVS = Electrically operated non-automatic.
9 Requires 42-inch (1066.8 mm) deep structure.
Switch Rating 1
Amperes 2
Fuse Clip SizeAmperes
Unit Space
Incoming Line Feeder
Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual
30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)——
3X 3X——
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X 2X 2X 2X
60/60 Dual 100 200 400
60/60 Dual 100 200 400
—18 (457.2)30 (762.0)48 (1219.2)
— 3X 5X 8X
12 (304.8)18 (457.2)30 (762.0)42 (1066.8)
2X 3X 5X 7X
600 8001200 6
600 8001200
54 (1371.8) 348 (1219.2) 460 (1524.0)
9X 3
8X 4
10X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2) 560 (1524.0)
8X 8X 5
10X
Numberof Circuits
Chassis Rating (Amperes)
Unit SpaceInches (mm)
1-Phase3-Wire
3-Phase4-Wire
1-Phase3-Wire
3-Phase4-Wire
183042
225225225
100100225
24 (609.6) or 4X30 (762.0) or 5X36 (914.4) or 6X
24 (609.6) or 4X30 (762.0) or 5X36 (914.4) or 6X
Numberof Circuits
ChassisRating(Amperes)
Unit Space Inches (mm)
3-Phase3-Wire
3-Phase4-Wire
141824
100250100
—36 (914.4) or 6X36 (914.4) or 6X
36 (914.4) or 6X——
263236
250100250
——48 (1219.2) or 8X
48 (1219.2) or 8X48 (1219.2) or 8X—
424212
100250400/600
48 (1219.2) or 8X60 (1524.0) or 10X36 (914.4) or 6X
60 (1524.0) or 10X60 (1524.0) or 10X—
143042
400/600400/600400/600
—48 (1219.2) or 8X60 (1524.0) or 10X
48 (1219.2) or 8X60 (1524.0) or 10X72 (1828.8) or 12X
Poles MaximumVoltage
Plug-in Bolt-on AmpereInterruptingCapacity
1/2/31/2/31/2/31/2/3
240240600600
HQPQPHW——
BABQBHWEHDHFD
10,00022,00014,00065,000
AmpereRating
Switch 7
Type InterruptingRating (kA)
UnitWidth
UnitSpace
100 8 150 8
Cutler-Hammer MTVX, NTVSCutler-Hammer MTVX, NTVS
65 65
20 (508.0) 7
36 (914.4) or 6X
100 150
Cutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVI
65 65
48 (1219.2) or 8X
225 300 400
Cutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVI
65 65 65
72 (1828.8) or 12X
600 8001000
Cutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVI
50 50 50
24 (609.6)7
72 (1828.8) or 12X
1000120016002000
Cutler-Hammer ATVISPCutler-Hammer ATVISPCutler-Hammer ATVISPCutler-Hammer ATVISP
100100100100
44 (1117.6)9
72 (1828.8) or 12X
100 150
ASCO Type 7000ASCO Type 7000
65 65
20 (508.0) 9
72 (1828.8) or 12X
260 400
ASCO Type 7000ASCO Type 7000
65 35
28 (711.2)9
600 800
ASCO Type 7000ASCO Type 7000
35 50
36 (914.4)9
10001200
ASCO Type 7000ASCO Type 7000
50100
40 (1016.0)9
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-33June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1257
Table 30.1-71. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers■ Transformer 1.0 – 2.0 kVA will include a circuit breaker and
fuses in a standard 2X unit.■ Transformers 3.0 kVA and above have taps and
electrostatic shields as standard.■ Transformers 3.0 kVA and above will include the
primary and secondary circuit breakers housed behind a single door.
1 Transformers feeding an MCC mounted panelboard require a secondary breaker or main breaker in panelboard.
Table 30.1-72. Power Factor Correction CapacitorsPF capacitors are electrolytic type and are optionally avail-able with external line fuses and blown fuse indicators. Capacitors’ sizes must be specified by the customer.
Caution: Capacitors on the main bus of the MCC may affect solid-state equipment. Please consult factory.
Table 30.1-73. Current Limiting Reactors — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Structures contain three single-phase 60 Hz reactors which limit available short circuit current from 100,000 rms amperes to 14,000 rms amperes. Reactors available with ohmic values of .01, .015, .02 and .025.
Table 30.1-74. TVSS (Clipper Power System) with Circuit Breaker DisconnectIncludes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C contact, alarm enable and disable, and circuit breaker disconnect.
2 Also available in 12-inch (304.8 mm) unit (2X) without circuit breaker disconnect.
Note: Specify 3-phase Delta or 3-phase Wye.
Table 30.1-75. DeviceNet CommunicationsDeviceNet-enabled components in MCCs eliminate up to 90% of the control wiring versus traditional hardwired designs. 24 Vdc DeviceNet is prewired throughout the MCC. Trunk cable is provided in the horizontal wireway. Drop cable is provided for vertical wireways and units.
3 IT. starters up to 66 amperes require additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) when selecting DN50, DN65 DeviceNet interfaces.
kVARating
UnitSpace
Primary Breaker(included in space factor)
Secondary Breaker 1
(included in space factor) 230 V 480 V
Single-Phase .5 .75 1
2X2X2X
15 15 15
15 15 15
———
1.5 2 3
2X2X4X
15 15 15
15 15 15
—— 20
5 7.510
4X4X4X
15 20 25
15 20 30
30 40 60
152025
5X5X5X
40 50 60
40 60 70
90125150
3045
6X7X
70100
80125
175250
Three-Phase 91525
5X5X6X
15 20 40
15 25 40
40 60 90
3045
6X6X
40 60
50 70
125175
kvarRating
208 V Unit Space 240 V Unit Space 600 V Unit Space
Inches (mm)
X Space Inches (mm)
X Space Inches (mm)
X Space
2 3 4
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
5 7.5 10
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
15 20 22.5
12 (304.8)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
2X4X4X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
25 30 40
———
———
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)—
4X4X—
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
50 60 75
———
———
———
———
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
90100120
———
———
———
———
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
4X6X6X
Amperes Unit Space Mounting
Inches (mm) X Space
600 80010001200
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
12X12X12X12X
21 D x 20 W (533.4 D x 508.0 W)21 D x 20 W (533.4 D x 508.0 W)26 D x 28 W (660.4 D x 711.2 W)26 D x 28 W (660.4 D x 711.2 W)
Description Unit Space 2
Inches(mm)
X Space
Surge Current Per Phase100 kA CPS-100120 kA CPS-120 (Recommended Branch Unit)160 kA CPS-160200 kA CPS-200
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X3X
250 kA CPS-250 (Recommended Service Entrance)300 kA CPS-300400 kA CPS-400500 kA CPS-500
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X3X
Part Number
Description Space Requirements
WPONIDNA DeviceNet interface for Advantage Starter
No Additional Space
DN65 DeviceNet interface for Freedom Starter
No Additional Space
MVXDN MVX Adjustable FrequencyDrives DeviceNet Interface
No Additional Space
OPTC7 SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives DeviceNet Interface
—
DN50, DN65 Discrete DeviceNet Interface for IT. Solid-State Starters
3
PS1 Single 5 ampere Power Supply 2X
PS2 Dual 5 ampere Power Supply 2X
PanelMate 1700
Operator interface for DeviceNet System
12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X
DN50 DeviceNet I/O module 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X Minimum
30.1-34
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1258
Earth Leakage BreakersEarth Leakage Breakers offer Class 1 ground fault protection down to the 30 mA level.
■ Ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from .03 to 30 A in eight steps.
■ Ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds in six steps.
Standard Features■ Built-in push-to-trip for functional testing.■ Tripped window indicates red for ground fault trip.■ Alarm contact for remote indication of trip.
Table 30.1-76. Earth Leakage Breakers
1 Six-inch (152.4 mm) not required for NEMA size 6 starters.
Table 30.1-77. Electronic Metering Specifications 23
2 Requires 12-inch (1X) unit space.3 For Power Xpert meter, See Section 3.4 At computer only.5 Up to 24 data values may be used for Trend Analysis with Time,
Date Stamp.6 Communications to Modbus, Ethernet available via optional
Communication Modules.
Table 30.1-78. Incoming Line Metering and Bus Protection
7 Two electronic meters will fit in a single 12-inch (304.8 mm) (2X) unit.8 3-phase/3-wire systems require 2 CTs. 3-phase/4-wire systems require
3 CTs.9 Ammeters require 2 CTs for 3-phase/3-wire systems, and 3 CTs for
3-phase/4-wire systems. Voltmeters require 2 PTs for 3-phase/3-wire systems, and 3-PTs for 3-phase/4-wire systems.
j Without disconnect 12 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X.
Harmonic Correction
Table 30.1-79. Clean Control CenterThe Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Clean Control Center is an integrated power correction system that provides harmonic correction directly on the MCC Horizontal Bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and dynamically injects into the Horizontal Bus a synthesized waveform which cancels harmonic content from non-linear loads such as ac drives. The result is a clean waveform. Clean Control Centers are UL 845 listed.
k Clean Control Center model includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCE structure, current transformers and door-mounted digital interface panel.
l Multiple units can be applied in parallel for additional harmoniccorrection.
Frame HMCP or Thermal-Magnetic
Additional SpaceRequired
FJK
YesYesYes
1X 11X 11X 1
Description IQ 320 IQ DP-4130 IQ Analyzer 6400 and 6600
Volts L-L, L-N L-L, L-N L-L, L-N
Current A, B, C A, B, C A, B, C, N, G
Power Watt, var, VA Watt, var, VA Watt, var, VA
Power Factor Apparent, Displacement
Apparent, Displacement
Apparent, Displacement
Frequency Hertz Hertz Hertz
THD — Amperes, Volts Amperes, Volts
Demand Values All All All
Trend Analysis 4 — Time, Date 5
ProgrammableOutput Relays
— (3) 10AForm C
(4) 10A Form C
ProgrammableAnalog Outputs
— — (3) 0-10/4-20 mA
Contact Inputs — (1) kWDemand
(3) + 30 Vdc Differential
Analog Inputs — — (1) 0-20/4-20 mA
Display Type Reverse ModeLCD with LEDBacklight
7 SegmentLED
Graphic LCDwith LED Backlight
Communications 6 Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Type Description Unit SpaceInches (mm) 7
SwitchboardMeters 9
1% Accuracy
AmmeterAmmeter with SwitchVoltmeterVoltmeter with Switch
12 (304.8)or 2X
AM/VMAM/VM with Switches
InstrumentTransformers
600/800 Ampere CT1000 Ampere CT2000 Ampere CT2500 Ampere CT
Consult Cutler-Hammer
480/120 PT 6 (152.4)or 1X
SignalTransducers
Current (Add CT) 1-PhaseVoltage (Add PT)Watt (Add CT and PT) 1-Phase
6 (152.4)or 1X
Voltage ProtectionTVSS (See Table 30.1-74)Ground Detection Lights — 3-Phase Underground SystemsSystem Voltage Monitor Lightning Arrester and Surge Capacitor
18 (457.2)or 3X j
6 (152.4)or 1X
Ground Fault Sensing C-HRG “Safe Ground” High Resistance Ground SystemCurrent Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep,
20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structurewithout a vertical wireway.
72 (1828.8)or 12XVoltage
HarmonicCurrent (Amperes)
Input Voltage
DisconnectType
StandardUnit Space k
Inches (mm)
StandardUnitSpace (X)
50 A ActiveHarmonic Filter l
Up to480 V
MoldedCase Switch
72 H x 20 W(1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
12X
100 A ActiveHarmonic Filter l
Up to480 V
MoldedCase Switch
72 H x 20 W(1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
12X
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-35June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1259
Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic Control — Typical Layout
Figure 30.1-2. Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic Control — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Note: As seen by the upstream electrical system — compliance to the most stringent standards of IEEE 519 is assured.
The layout above is a typical arrangement for Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Clean Control Center including harmonic correction units for non-linear loads such as ac Variable Frequency Drives. The horizontal bus of the Clean Control Center is virtually free of harmonic current content at the point where the Harmonic Correction Unit connects to the bus. From this point to the connection at the utility bus, the Clean Control Center complies with the most stringent requirements of IEEE 519 and provides
a clean waveform to the upstream distribution system. Harmonic Correction may be applied to loads fed directly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted ac drives) or loads fed indirectly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted circuit breakers feeding remote drives). Multiple correction units may be used to achieve the level of harmonic correction as required by the amount of non-linear loads within the MCC lineup.
MainBreaker
Panelboard HarmonicCorrection
Unit100 A
SVX9000ac Drive(30 hp)
SVX9000ac Drive(150 hp)
SVX9000ac Drive(250 hp)
SVX9000ac Drive(30 hp)Starter
TVSSProtection
Module
Starter
Starter
20.00(508.0)
Load SideHarmonics Present
Source SideHarmonics Attenuated
DistributionTransformer
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
28.00(711.2)
24.00(609.6)
24.00(609.6)
30.1-36
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1260
Standard Structures and Structure OptionsEaton’s Cutler-Hammer standard Free-dom or Advantage 2100 Series MCC structure is NEMA 1, gasketed, 90-inch (2286.0 mm) high, 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide with a depth as shown in Figure 30.1-3. Each standard structure has a 9-inch (228.6 mm) high horizontal wireway at the top and at the bottom and a 4-inch (101.6 mm) wide full height vertical wireway at the right.
All wireway doors are hinged and secured with 1/4-turn latches. The standard busing is 600 A, UL rated, copper horizontal bus and 300 A, UL rated, copper vertical bus braced for 65,000 symmetrical amperes. Many other bus sizes and types are avail-able. Also included as standard is a vertical bus isolation barrier.
Table 30.1-80. Standard Structures and Structure Options — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 30.1-81. Structure Modifications — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 The standard Freedom Series 2100 and Advantage structure is designed to comply with the UL 2-meter requirement. Disconnect operating handle is not more than 2 meters [78 inches (1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the MCC. Motor Control Centers elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. UL handle extension optionally available when required.
Description
Standard Structures16 (406.4) deep structure Structure 121 (533.4) deep structure
Front mounting only Structure 2Front and rear mounting Structure 3
4 (101.6) of additional structure width, 32 (812.8) maximum 8 (203.2) vertical wireway in lieu of standard 4-inch (101.6)
Special StructuresSingle corner section for “L” configuration of MCCTransition section
Series 2100 to Type W10 (254.0) wide — front aligned
Plug-in blank relay mounting space, per 6-inch Any 6 (152.4) heightFixed-mounted relay back pan, full depth of structure
20 (508.0) structure with wireway, 13 (330.2) with usable panel24 (609.6) structure with wireway, 17 (431.8) with usable panel28 (711.2) structure with wireway, 21 (533.4) with usable panel20 (508.0) structure without wireway, 17 (431.8) with usable panel24 (609.6) structure without wireway, 21 (533.4) with usable panel28 (711.2) structure without wireway, 25 (635.0) with usable panel32 (812.8) with double door36 (914.4) with double door40 (1016.0) with double door
Programmable controller mounting structure (per complete structure with full fixed mounting back pan)
20 (508.0) structure with wireway Complete section24 (609.6) structure with wireway Complete section28 (711.2) structure with wireway Complete section20 (508.0) structure without wireway Complete section24 (609.6) structure without wireway Complete section28 (711.2) structure without wireway Complete section
Plexiglass see-through door insert for PLC structure 6 (152.4) increments19 (482.6) instrumentation mounting racks installed in PLC structure Consult Eaton
Channel floor sills: 11-gauge, 1 x 3 (25.4 x 76.2)NEMA 1 gasketNEMA 12 dust-proof, includes bottom plateBottom plate for NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure150-watt space heater, per structureThermostat for space heater controlPullbox kit for cable and wiring to be field mounted on top structure
12 (304.8) high18 (457.2) high24 (609.6) high
Rear hinged structure door, 72 (1828.8) highNEMA 2 drip shield on top of MCCNEMA 3R non-walk-in
Front-mountedBack-to-back
NEMA 3R walk-in aisle-front mountedNEMA 3R walk-in tunnel typeNEMA 4X — consult factorySpecial reduced height structuresSeismic certification (earthquake qualification)UL handle extension 1
Figure 30.1-3. Structure — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
16 (406.4)
20(508.0)
90(22286.0)
21 (533.4)
Structure 2 ➀72-inch (1828.8 mm) SpaceFront Mounted Only
Structure 3 72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space — Front—66-inch (1676.4 mm) Space — Rear—Back-to-Back
Structure 1 ➀72-inch (1828.8 mm) SpaceFront Mounted Only
Top HorizontalWireway
VerticalVeVWireway
VerticalVeVCompartment
BottomHorizontalWireway
20(508.0)
21 (533.4)
20(508.0)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-37June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1261
Table 30.1-82. Bus Modifications — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 30.1-83. Main Lugs Only — Mechanical Lug Compartment (3-Phase, 3- or 4-wire) — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Provisions for terminating incoming line cables directly onto the MCC bus system. Up to 1200 A, all lug landings are bolted to a fully rated vertical bus in that section. MLO sections must be put at the top for top entry cables and at the bottom for bottom entry cables. For smaller cable sizes, cable lugs may also be extended into an optional top hat as shown in this table.
6 Requires 6-inch (152.4 mm) = (1X) unit space.7 Lug landings require the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Freedom and Advantage 2100 Series MCCs bear the UL label. Service entrance labeling is available.Description
Main Bus, Per Vertical Structure Cu — Tin-Plated (Standard)Copper Horizontal Bus Ratings Tin-Plated 50°C 65°C
600 A Size 800 A Size1200 A Size1600 A Size2000 A Size2500 A Size3200 A Size
.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) – Bars/Phase 2
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 4
.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) – Bars/Phase 6
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 8N/A
.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 2
.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) – Bars/Phase 4
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 6
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 8
———21 (533.4) Deep 1
21 (533.4) Deep 1
21 (533.4) Deep 2
21 (533.4) Deep 23
Silver-Plated Bus Main Horizontal BusInsulated main horizontal bus, per vertical structure (taping)Vertical bus, per vertical structure: 300 A — copper (tin-plated)Increased bus capacity: Rated at 600 A (Front mounted only)
Rated at 600 A (Back-to-back) — copperRated at 800 A (Back-to-back and front)Rated at 1200 A
Increased mechanical bus bracing, per vertical structure:42,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current65,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current100,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current
Vertical Bus isolation barrier, per vertical structureLabyrinth design insulation-isolation vertical bus barrierGround bus, 300 A standard, per vertical structureIncreased capacity ground bus only, 600 A, 1/4- x 2-inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm), per vertical structurePlug-in Grounding System, includes 300 A vertical ground bus and unit grounding clips, per vertical structureNeutral bus, ungrounded for 3-phase, 4-wire power, per vertical structure 5Splice plates
OptionalOptionalStandard 4
Cu OnlyStandardCu OnlyCu Only
OptionalStandardOptionalStandardOptional FreedomStandard Cu Standard Cu Cu Cu —
1 Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.2 Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Not available in back-to-back structure.3 Contact Eaton for 3200 ampere dimensions.4 Vertical bus and unit stabs are tin-plated copper only.5 Neutral is half-rating of horizontal bus.
MaximumCable Size(kcmil)
Bus Rating(Amperes)
MaximumCablesper Phase
Cable Entry(Top orBottom)
LugType
UnitSpace
X Space6
EnclosureWidth
350 600 2 — ScrewCrimp
12 (304.8)18 (457.2)
2X 3X
20 (508.0)
4 Top
Bottom
ScrewScrewCrimp
18 (457.2)24 (609.6)36 (914.4)
3X 4X 6X
18-inch (457.2 mm)Top Hat
Either — —
600 800 2 — ScrewCrimp
18 (457.2)24 (609.6)
3X 4X
4 — ScrewCrimp
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)
4X 6X
18-inch (457.2 mm)Top Hat
Either — —
750 1000 2
4
— ScrewCrimpScrewCrimp
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)36 (914.4) 748 (1219.2) 7
4X 6X12X12X
1000 1200 2 — ScrewCrimp
30 (762.0)36 (914.4)
5X 6X
1000 2500 8 — ScrewCrimp
72 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 7
12X12X
3200 — — ScrewCrimp
72 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 7
12X12X
Bus Duct Entry Sandwich Type to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect — Pull BoxPull box and pre-fabricated bus con-nectors are supplied to match the sandwich type bus duct end flange. Bus duct is assumed to enter the top. Bus duct type and orientation to the MCC must be provided.
Table 30.1-84. Bus Duct Entry to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect — Pull Box — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8 Contact Eaton for 3200 ampere dimensions.Note: Consult factory for non-segregated bus requirements.
Horizontal Bus Rating (Amperes)
Pull BoxHeight
600 – 16002000 – 2500 8
18 (457.2)24 (609.6)
30.1-38
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1262
Table 30.1-85. Typical Heat Loss Data
Table 30.1-86. Typical Weights in lbs. (kg)
1 Weight for NEMA 1 structure with 600 ampere horizontal and 300 ampere vertical bus.
Description Current (A) Loss (W)
VerticalSectionsHorizontal Bus and Ampacity
600 80012001600200025003200
200 300 500 700100014002050
Space Heaters (Each) 500
FVNR Size 1 40
FVNR Size 2 60
FVNR Size 3 100
FVNR Size 4 130
FVNR Size 5 230
FNVR Size6 400
16-Inch (406.4 mm) Deep x 20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Structure 121-Inch (533.4 mm) Deep x 20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Structure 1
200 (91)
260 (118)
Adder for Horizontal Bus
800 A1000 A1200 A1600 A2000 A2500 A3200 A
10 (5) 15 (7) 18 (8) 24 (11) 30 (14) 38 (17) 49 (22)
Adder for Vertical Bus
600 A 800 A1200 A
30 (14) 40 (18) 60 (27)
Adder for Units Freedom – Inches (mm)
12.00 (304.8)18.00 (457.2)24.00 (609.6)30.00 (762.0)36.00 (914.4)
25 (11.4) 40 (18) 63 (29) 77 (35)100 (45)
Table 30.1-87. Freedom and Advantage MCC Ratings and HighlightsFeature Freedom Advantage
Vertical Bus Barrier Flat Glastic, Labyrinth Available Labyrinth
Communications from Starter Units IQ 500 via PowerNet, DN65 via DeviceNet IQ MP-3000 via PowerNet
Advantage WPONI or CMU via PowerNetWPONIDNA via DeviceNet
Bus Bracing 65 kA Standard42 and 100 kA Available
65 kA Standard100 kA Available
Control Wire #16 Standard #14 Standard 4
Horizontal Bus Material Copper Copper
Pilot Devices 10250T ACM or 10250T
6-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Compartment F206 Size 1 W206 Sizes 1 and 2
FVNR Sizes 3 and 4 18-inch (457.2 mm) Compartment 12- or 18-inch (304.8 or 457.2 mm) Compartment
FVNR Size 6 54-inch (1371.6 mm) Compartment 36-inch (914.4 mm) Compartment4 6-inch (152.4 mm) units available with #16 control wire only.
Table 30.1-86. Control Power Transformer DataAll Control Power transformers are encapsulated and will deliver rated secondary voltage at full load. Two primary and one secondary fuses are furnished as standard.
2 Maximum size without increasing starter space.3 6-inch (152.4 mm) unit.
NEMASizeStarter
Starter Type
Freedom Advantage
StandardVA Rating
Maximum 2
VA RatingStandardVA Rating
Maximum 2
VA Rating
Size 1Size 1 3Size 2Size 2 3Size 3Size 4Size 5Size 6
Full VoltageNon-Reversingand Reversing
100100100N/A150200200150
150100150N/A250250350250
100100100100150150300300
150100150100250250350350
Size 2Size 3Size 4Size 5Size 6
Autotransformer 100150200250200
150250250350350
150150150500500
250250250500500
Size 1Size 2Size 3Size 4Size 5Size 6
Two-Speed One Winding
100100200350350200
200200250500500350
200200200200500500
250250250250500500
Size 1Size 2Size 3Size 4Size 5Size 6
Two-Speed Two Winding
100100150200200200
150150250250250350
100100150150300300
250250250250350350
Size 1Size 2Size 3Size 4Size 5Size 6
Part Winding 150150200350350200
150150250500500350
200200200200200500
250250250250250500
Size 2Size 3Size 4Size 5Size 6
Wye Delta(Open or Closed Transition)
200350350200200
200200500500350
200200200500500
250250250500500
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-39June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data
Sheet 1263
Motor ProtectionIn line with 2005 NEC 430.6(A) circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selections are based on full load currents for induction motors running at speeds normal for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics using data taken from NEC Table 130.250 (3-phase). Actual motor nameplate ratings shall be used for selecting motor running overload protection. Motors built special for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and applications will require other considerations as defined in the application section of the NEC.
These additional considerations may require the use of a higher rated HMCP, or at least one with higher magnetic pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based on known characteristics of Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer type breakers, specific units are recommended. The current ratings are no more than the maxi-mum limits set by the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters. Motors with lower code letters will require further considerations.
In general, these selections were based on:
1. Ambient — Outside enclosure not more than 40°C (104°F).
2. Motor starting — Infrequent starting, stopping or reversing.
3. Motor accelerating time — 10 seconds or less.
4. Locked rotor — Maximum 6 times motor FLA.
Type HMCP motor circuit protector may not set at more than 1300% of the motor full-load current to comply with NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA Design B energy high-efficiency motors which can be set up to 1700%.)
Circuit breaker selections are based on types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types may be required to satisfy specific system application requirements.
For motor full load currents of 208 and 200 volts, increase the corresponding 230-volt motor values by 10 and 15% respectively.
Table 30.1-88. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection GuideHorsepower Full Load
Amperes(NEC) FLA
Fuse Size NEC 430.52Maximum Amperes
Recommended Cutler-Hammer
Circuit Breaker
Motor Circuit Protector Type HMCP
Time Delay Non-Time Delay Amperes Type Amperes Adj. Range
230 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3
3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6
10 10 15 20
15 20 25 30
15 15 15 20
HFDHFDHFDHFD
7 15 15 30
21 – 70 45 – 150 45 – 150 90 – 300
5 7-1/2 10 15
15.2 22 28 42
30 40 50 80
50 70 90 150
30 50 60 90
HFDHFDHFDHFD
30 50 50100
90 – 300 150 – 500 150 – 500 300 – 1000
20 25 30 40
54 68 80104
100 125 150 200
175 225 250 350
100125150150
HFDHFDHFDHFD
100150150150
300 – 1000 450 – 1500 450 – 1500 750 – 2500
50 60 75100
130154192248
250 300 350 450
400 500 600 800
200225300400
HFDHFDHKDHKD
150250400400
750 – 25001250 – 25002000 – 40002000 – 4000
125150200
312360480
600 7001000
100012001600
500600700
HLDHLDHND
600600600
1800 – 60001800 – 60001800 – 6000
460 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3
1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8
6 6 6 10
6 10 15 15
15 15 15 15
HFDHFDHFDHFD
7 7 7 15
21 – 70 21 – 70 21 – 70 45 – 150
5 7-1/2 10 15
7.6 11 14 21
15 20 25 40
25 35 45 70
15 25 35 45
HFDHFDHFDHFD
15 30 30 50
45 – 150 90 – 300 90 – 300 150 – 500
20 25 30 40
27 34 40 52
50 60 70 100
90 110 125 175
50 70 70100
HFDHFDHFDHFD
50 70100100
150 – 500 210 – 700 300 – 1000 300 – 1000
50 60 75100
65 77 96124
125 150 175 225
200 150 300 400
110125150175
HFDHFDHJDHJD
150150150150
450 – 1500 750 – 2500 750 – 2500 750 – 2500
125150200
156180240
300 350 450
500 600 800
225250350
HKDHJDL600
400400600
2000 – 40002000 – 40001800 – 6000
575 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3
1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9
3 6 6 10
6 10 10 15
15 15 15 15
HFDHFDHFDHFD
3 7 7 7
9 – 30 21 – 70 21 – 70 21 – 70
5 7-1/2 10 15
6.1 9 11 17
15 20 20 30
20 30 35 60
15 20 25 40
HFDHFDHFDHFD
15 30 30 30
45 – 150 90 – 300 90 – 300 90 – 300
20 25 30 40
22 27 32 41
40 50 60 80
70 90 100 125
50 60 60 80
HFDHFDHFDHFD
50 50 70100
150 – 500 150 – 500 210 – 500 300 – 1000
50 60 75100
52 62 77 99
100 110 150 175
175 200 250 300
100125150175
HFDHFDHFDHJD
100150150150
300 – 1000 750 – 2500 750 – 2500 750 – 2500
125150200
125144192
225 300 350
400 450 600
200225300
HJDHJDHKD
250250400
1250 – 25001250 – 25002000 – 4000
30.1-40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageTechnical Data/Dimensions
Sheet 1264
Table 30.1-89. Starter Sizes Selection Guide
1 Information is based on Table 430-150 of NEC (1999).2 Information is based on use of copper conductors — Table 310-16 and Tables 1, 4 and 5, Ch. 9 of NEC. If aluminum conductors are used refer to
Table 310-16 of NEC (1999).
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 30.1-4. Side View A — Front Mounted Only3 Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only.
When location not specified, MTB supplied at the bottom.4 Standard structure arrangement in front
Without MTB; A & B = 9 (228.6)With MTB at bottom; A & B = 9 (228.6)With MTB at top; A = 15 (381.0), B = 3 (76.2)
Figure 30.1-5. Side View B — Front and Rear Mounted5 Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only.
When location not specified, MTB supplied at the bottom.6 Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure.7 Standard structure arrangement in front
Without MTB; A & B = 9 (228.6)With MTB at bottom; A & B = 9 (228.6)With MTB at top; A = 15 (381.0), B = 3 (76.2)
8 Standard structure arrangement in rearWithout MTB; C = 9 (228.6), D = 72 (1828.8), E = 3 (76.2)With MTB at bottom; C = 0, D = 66 (1676.4), E = 9 (228.6)With MTB at top; C = 12 (304.8), D = 60 (1524.0), E = 3 (76.2)
Squirrel-CageMotor Horsepower
230 V, 3-Phase 460 V, 3-Phase 575 V, 3-Phase
Control CenterStarter NEMASize
Full Load 1 Current Amperes
Wire Size 2
at 75°C Max. at 40°C Amb.
Control CenterStarter NEMASize
Full Load 1
Current Amperes
Wire Size 2 at 75°C Max. at 40°C Amb.
Control CenterStarter NEMASize
Full Load 1
Current Amperes
Wire Size 2 at 75°C Max. at 40°C Amb.
1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2
1111
2.2 3.2 4.2 6.0
14 14 14 14
1111
1.1 1.6 2.1 3.0
14 14 14 14
1111
.9 1.3 1.7 2.4
14 14 14 14
2 3 5 7-1/2
1111
6.8 9.6 15.2 22
14 14 12 10
1111
3.4 4.8 7.6 11
14 14 14 14
1111
2.7 3.9 6.1 9
14 14 14 14
10 15 20 25
2233
28 42 54 68
10 8 6 4
1222
14 21 27 34
14 10 10 8
1222
11 17 22 27
14 12 10 10
30 40 50 60
3445
80104130154
3 1 1/0 3/0
3334
40 52 65 77
8 6 4 3
3334
32 41 52 62
8 8 6 4
75100125150
5566
192248312360
4/0300 kcmil500 kcmil 2 – 4/0
4455
96124156180
2 1/0 3/0 4/0
4455
77 99125144
3 2 1/0 2/0
200250300
6——
480——
2 – 300 kcmil——
566
240302361
300 kcmil500 kcmil 2 – 4/0
566
192242289
4/0300 kcmil400 kcmil
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Horizontal Bus Location
Vertical Bus LocationLocation ofGround Bus
10.50(266.7)(266.7)
12 1212.12)(307.8)
3.12 (79.2)
4.62 (117.3)
4.62 (117.3)
RemovableBus Barrier
Flat Rear CoverSupplied on FrontMounted OnlyStructure
Minimum Rated VerticalVBus Supplied as Standardin Front Mounted OnlyStructure
➃
A2.25(57.2)
➂
➂
➃
Front Horizontal Wireway 7.16 (181.9) Deep
BFloor Line
25.4)1.00 (2
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills3 inch (76.2 mm) Channel SiledSupplied Only When Specifie9.73 (247.14)
or 14.11 (358.4)o20.11 (510.8)
)or 15.73 (399.5)
010.50(266.7)(266 7
LLocation of Neutral BusWhen SpecifiedWhen Specified
3.00(76.2)76.2)
5.00 (127.0)
Horizontal Bus Location
Vertical Bus Location
yRear Horizontal Wireway4.97 (126.2) Deep
Location ofGround Bus
Front HorizontalWireway
7.16 (181.9) Deep
A
erRemovable Bus Barrie
C
9.2)3.12 (79
17.3)4.62 (11
4.62 (117.3)4.62 (11
10.50(266.7)
2.25(57.2)
12 1212.12(307.8)
15.00(381.0)
➄
➄
➆
B
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel SillsSupplied Only When Specified
Location of Neutral BusLocation of Neutral BWhen SpecifiedWhen Specified
Floor Line
➄
➇
➅
CCCC
D
E
1.00 (25.4)
5.00 (127.0)5.00 (1
110.50(266.7)266 7
03.00(76.2)(76 2
20.11 (510.8)or 15.73 (399.5)or 15.73 (399.5)
9.73 (247.14)or 14.11 (358.4)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-41June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageDimensions
Sheet 1265
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 30.1-6. 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 16 Inches (406.4 mm) — Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)
Figure 30.1-7. 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21 Inches (533.4 mm) — Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
R blRemovableR blTop Cover
3.503 50(88.9)(
3.503 50(88.9)(
Top ConduitSpace
5.41(137.4)
16.00(406.4)
1.25(31.8)(31.8)
Vertical WirewayDoor
17 5017.50(444.5)
20.00(508.0)
Wire TieBrackets
7.31(185.7)
VVerticalWWireway4.81
(1122.2)Removable BottomFrame Members d
Bottom Conduit Space bc
13 9713.97(354.8)
.70(17.8)
16.00(406.4)
.53 Dia. a
2.00(50.8).53 Dia. a
5.41(137.4)
6.81(173.0)
e
17.50(444.5)
2.20(55.9)
1.25(31.8)
1 251.25((31.8)
1.25(31.8)
1.58(40.1)
RemovableTop Cover
3.50(88.9)
3.50(88.9)
Top ConduitSpace
5.41(137.4)
20.38(517.7)
1.25(31.8)
Vertical WirewayDoor17.50
(444.5)
20.00(508.0)
2.20(55.9)
1 251.25(31.8)(31.8)
16.00(406.4)(406.4)(406.4).53 Dia. a
5.41(137.4)
5.78(146.8)
e
f
17 5017.5017 50(444.50)444.50444.50
1.25(31.8)
1 251.251 25(31.8)(
5.41(137.4)
1.58(40.1)
Removable BottomFrame Members d
Bottom Conduit Space bc
.70.70.70)(17.88)
.53 Dia. . aaa
2.002 00((50.8)(
WWire W TieBracketsBracketsBrackets
7 317.317 31((185.7)(
VVerticalVWirewayWirewayWireway4.81
(122.2)
8.3518866.1)(466
1 Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 (50.8).36 (9.1) — 16 recommended.
2 Recommended maximum conduit height above floor line 3.5 (88.9).
3 Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.5 x 9.73 (444.5 x 247.1).
4 For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic.
5 This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available.
6 Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in FMO structure.
See Side View A Page 30.1-40 for vertical dimensions.
30.1-42
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageDimensions
Sheet 1266
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 30.1-8. 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep-Front and Rear Mounted
Figure 30.1-9. 10 Inches (254.0 mm) Wide, 16 or 21 Inches (406.4 or 533.4 mm) Deep — Transition Structure
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
RemovableTop Cover
3 503.50(88.9)
3.50(88.9)
Top ConduitSpace
5.41(137.4)
21.00(533.4)
1.25(31.8)(31 8)
Front Vertical Wireway DoorWireway Door
17 5017.50(444.5)
20.00(508.0)
2.20(55.9)
1.25(31.8)(31.8)
2.20(55.9)
3.22(81.79)
Removable BottomFrame Members d
Bottom Conduit Space bc
18.35(466.1)
1.32(33.5)
16.00(406.4)
.53 Dia. a
2.00(50.8).53 Dia. a
5.41(137.4)
e
17 5017.50(444.50)444.50)
1 251.25(31.8)
1 251.25(31.8)
5.41(137.4)
5.78(146.81)
WiWire TiTieBrackets
7.317.31)(185.7)
VVerticalWirewayWireway4.81
(122.2)122.2)
7 317.31)(185.7)
4.81(122.2)
RearVerticalWireway
RemovableTop Cover
Top ConduitSpace 20.38
(517.7)oor 16.00(406.4)
1.25(31.8)
10 0010.00(254.0)
2.20(55.9)
1.25(31.8)
5.41(137.4)
Removable BottomFrame Members d
Bottom ConduitSpace bc
.70(17.8)
.53 Dia.(2) a
5.41(137.4)
e
1.25(31.8)
1.25(31.8)
5.41(137.4)
5.78(146.81)
5.00(127.0)
Ground BusLocation
2.25(57.15)
HorizontalWireway
7.16 inches(181.9 mm) deep
12.12(307.9)
Horizontal BusLocation g
3.12(79.25)
4.62(117.35)
4.62(117.35)
Removable BusBarrier
Flat CoverSupplied onRear of FrontMounted OnlyStructure
Floor Line
Location of Neutral BusWhen Specified
1.00(25.4)
5.00(127.0)
10.50(266.7)
3.00(76.2)
9.73 (247.14)or 14.11 (358.4)
f
18.35 (466.1)or 13.97 (354.8)
20.11 (510.8)or 15.73 (399.5)
7.50(190.5)
1.58(40.1)
7.50(190.5)(190.5
1 Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 (50.8) .36 (9.1) — 16 recommended.
2 Recommended maximum conduit height above floor line 3.5 (88.9).
3 Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.5 x 14.11 (444.5 x 358.4) in 21-inch deep structure. 7.5 x 9.73 (190.5 x 247.1) in 16-inch deep structure.
4 For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic.
5 This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available.
6 Channel sills supplied only when specified. For seismic loads channel sills if required must be embedded so top of channel sill is still at floor level.
See Side View B Page 30.1-40 for vertical dimensions.
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-43June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageDimensions
Sheet 1267
Figure 30.1-10. 16-Inch (406.4 mm) Deep Front and Rear Mounted Corner Structure
Figure 30.1-11. 21-Inch (533.4 mm) Deep Front and Rear Mounted Corner Structure
0.50(12.7)
CornerEnclosure
CornerEnclosure
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
19.22(488.2)
19.22(488.2)
16.00(406.4)
16.00(406.4)
16.00(406.4)
Right-Hand Drawing
Right-HandDrawing
Front
1.25(31.8)
1.25(31.8)
5.65(143.6)
4.62(117.4)
11.48(291.6)
Horizontal Bus Location
1.25(31.8)
5.40(137.2)
2.00(50.8)
2.00(50.8)
0.00
0.00
4.78(121.4)(Ref)
4.00(101.6)(Ref)
1.25(31.8)
10.00(254.0)
2.00(50.8)
19.22(488.2)
18.60(472.5)
20.00(508.0)
18.38(466.9)
18.60(472.5)
18.00(457.2)
Top & BottomConduit / Wire Space
CornerEnclosure
CornerEnclosure
21.00(533.4)
21.00(533.4)
21.00(533.4)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
23.60(599.4)
23.60(599.4)
24.38(616.7)
24.38(616.7)
Right-HandDrawing
Right-HandDrawing
Front
1.25(31.8)
1.25(31.8)
1.25(31.8)
3.49(88.7)
22.76(578.1)
24.38(616.7)
5.65(143.5)
4.62(117.4)
11.48(291.6)
Horizontal Bus Location
1.25(31.8)
2.00(50.8)
22.97(538.4)
22.38(568.5)
12.19(309.6)
23.60(599.4)
22.97(583.4)
2.00(50.8)
2.00(50.8)
4.00(101.6)(Ref)
4.78(121.4)(Ref)
5.40(137.2)
Top & BottomConduit / Wire Space
0.00
0.00
0.50(12.7)
30.1-44
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageDimensions
Sheet 1268
Figure 30.1-12. Freedom Series 2100 Motor Control Center Outline and Floor Plan NEMA 3R 28.85-Inch (732.8 mm) Deep Structure — Dimensions in Inches (mm)1 Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 inches (50.8 mm). 38 (9.7 mm) — 16 recommended.2 Recommended maximum conduit height above floor line 3.5 inches (88.9 mm).3 Maximum conduit space with channel sills 15.78 x 16.6 inches (400.8 x 421.6 mm).4 Master terminal block assembly furnished for type “C” wiring only. When location not specified MTB supplied at the bottom.5 Recommended standard anchor bolting for Detail 1. When channel sills are used see Detail 2.6 This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available.7 Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure.8 Standard structure arrangement (In front) without master terminal block, A and B — 9 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom,
A and B — 9 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A — 15 inches (381.0 mm), B — 3 inches (76.2 mm).Note: Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure.
Minimum Rated Vertical BusSupplied on FrontMounted Only Structures
TopConduitSpace
23.50 (596.9)16.00
(406.4)
17.50(444.5)(444.5)03.00
(76.2)(76 2
3.78 (96.0)8 (96.0
BottomConduitSpace➁➂
➅
Location of NeutralBus When Specified
Detail 1 ➄
4.00 (101.6)
2.25(57.2)
➅
FloorLine
A A01 02 03
➃
4.31 (109.5)20 (508.0)
15.69 (398.5)
Upper HorizontalWireway Door 2.25
(57.2)57.2
➇
➀
➀
➃
VerticalVeVWireway
25 7525.75(654.1)(654 1)
1 881.88(47.8)(47 8)
2.87 (72.9)
28.85(732.8)(732.8)
20.30(515.6)(515.6)
03.50(88.9)➆
VerticalVeVWireway
Wire TieBrackets
(108.0)4.25
4.81 (122.2) (44.5)1.75
SECTION A-A
4.62 (117.3)
.75(19.1)
Detail 2 ➄
24.85(631 2)(631.2)(631 2)
2.12(53.8)
5.00(127.0)
B
LowerHorizontalWirewayDoor
nVertical Bus LocatioVeV n
7.97 (204.2)
.18(4.6)4 6 .18 (4.6)
28 85 (732 8)28.85 (732.8)9.80(248.9)
4.82(122.4)
23 5023.50(599.4)(599 4)
(185.7)7.31
94.62(2403.3)2403.3)
5.78 (146.8)78 (14
24 85 (631 2)24.85 (631.2)
9 55.25(2419.4)2419.4
A
CLCLC
4.25 (108.0)
1.25 (31.8)Max.
3.50(88.9)
Channel Sills4 x 1.56 (101.6 x 39.6)
.75(19.1)
24.85(631.2)
23 3523.35(593.1)(593 1)(593.1)
90.00(2286.0)2286.0
2.38(60.5)
2.252.25(57.2)(57.2
1.755 (44.5)(44.5 11.75(44.5)
04.00(101.66)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)127.0)
33.00(76.2) 3.753.75
(95.3)(95 33 753.75
(95.3)95 3
24.85(631.2) 23.35
(593.1)
.75 (19.1)
.75 (19.1)
15.78(400.8)
1.56(39.6)
14.044 041.88 (447.8)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.1-45June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom & AdvantageMotor Control Center — Layout Form
Sheet 1269
Table 30.1-90. Arrangement of Structures (Numbered from Left to Right) Typical Dimensions: Indoor — 20-Inch (508.0 mm) W, 90-Inch (2286.0 mm) H; Outdoor 23.5-Inch (596.9 mm) W, 95.25-Inch (2419.4 mm) H
D–Future Space Onlyø–Unusable Space
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
G G
H H
J J
K K
L L
M M
(STR#) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
Shipping Split
(When Desired)
Unit No.
Starter Class or Description
Size HMCP Feeder Breaker or Switch Amperes
hp Extra Intlks.
Control Devices NameplateIdentifications
Pushbutton Selector Switches
Indicating Lights Meters
Sta
rt-S
top
Fw
d-R
ev-S
top
Fast-
Slo
w-S
top
Han
d-O
ff-A
uto
On
-Off
Fw
d-O
ff-R
ev
Fast-
Off
-Slo
w
Gre
en
(S
top
ped
)
Red
(R
un
, Fw
d, Fast)
Am
ber
(Rev. S
low
)
Pu
sh
-To
-Test
Tra
nsfo
rmer
Typ
e
Ela
psed
Tim
e
Am
mete
r
Extr
a V
A o
n C
PT
NO NC
30.1-46
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 1270
This page intentionally left blank.
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-1
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent Technologies
General Description
Sheet 1271
IT.
2100 Series Motor Control Center
IT. 2100 Series Motor Control Center
General Description
Introduction
Eaton’s
IT.
Motor Control
Centers provide the highest level of quality and innovation for group Motor Control. 24 Vdc based electromechanical and solid-state motor control are the basis for the industry’s highest available starter density per structure. A full range of communication choices is made possible.
Features
■
UL label.
■
42, 65 and 100 kAIC ratings.
■
Molded Case, Insulated Case and Air Circuit Breakers.
■
3200 A maximum horizontal bus.
■
Self protecting 24 Vdc control circuits.
■
Highest hp per structure density in the industry.
■
Integrated control and communication bus.
■
Communication via multiple control and diagnostic networks.
Description
Motor Control Centers (MCCs) provide the best method for grouping motor control as well as associated distribu-tion equipment. Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Freedom and Advantage,
IT.
2100 Series Control Centers are specially designed to operate machinery, industrial processes and commercial building systems.
The MCC enclosure consists of a strong and rigid steel channel framework assembled into standardized vertical sections and bolted together to form a complete shipping section of up to 80-inch (2032.0 mm) maximum, four structures each. Structures include horizontal and vertical bus, insulation and isolation barriers, horizontal and vertical isolated wiring troughs, cable entrance areas and space for inserting starter and control equipment.
All control units, removable or fixed mounted, are assembled with Cutler-Hammer components of proven safety, quality and reliability. All components are wired in accordance with NEC and UL standards. Specifically designed bus stabs, insertion guides, handle mecha-nisms and safety interlocks are added to form a standardized plug-in unit which meets the highest safety standards.
IT.
2100 Series MCCs may be applied on electrical systems up to 600 V, 50 or 60 Hz having available fault currents of up to 100,000 amperes rms. Freedom dc Motor Control Centers are available up to 250 Vdc, having available fault currents up to 22,000 amperes rms. Enclosure designs include NEMA 1 Gasketed, 2, 12 and 3R. An ongoing temperature and short circuit design test program, as required by UL 845, ensures a quality product that meets the latest safety codes.
Replacement MCC Units
In addition to fully assembled, free-standing MCC lineups, replacement MCC plug-in units are available for:
■
Westinghouse 11-300, built from 1950.
■
Westinghouse Type W, built from 1965.
■
Westinghouse Five Star, built from 1975.
■
Westinghouse Series 2100, built since 1986.
■
Westinghouse Advantage, built since 1991.
■
Cutler-Hammer 9800, built from 1956.
■
Cutler-Hammer F10, built from 1972.
■
Cutler-Hammer Freedom, built since 1988.
■
Cutler-Hammer Freedom Series 2100, built since 1995.
A complete plug-in unit for adding to an existing MCC includes the plug-in unit, hinged door, isolating divider pan, and all necessary installation hardware.
Note:
Mounting hardware for old Cutler-Hammer MCCs is sold separately. Since MCC UL 845 standard was established in 1975, most standard replacement plug-in units will have UL labels.
Ordering Information
Replacement plug-in units should be ordered by description indicating:
■
Old General Order number/factory order number.
■
MCC model.
■
Type of plug-in unit.
■
Required features.
■
Circuit breaker or fuse rating.
■
Schematic reference, if any.
■
Motor data.
NEMA Classifications (ICS 3, Part 1)
Class I Control Centers
A mechanical grouping of combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other units arranged in a convenient assem-bly. Connections from the common horizontal power bus to the units are included. Interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices is not included. Only diagrams of the individual units are supplied.
When master terminal blocks are specified, a sketch showing general location of terminals is provided.
Class II Control Centers
The same as Class I, but designed to form a complete control system. They include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring between units and interlocking provisions to remotely mounted devices. A suitable diagram illustrating operation of the control associated with the motor control center will be provided.
When master terminal blocks are specified, the terminal arrangement and required wiring connections are shown on the diagram.
NEMA Types of Wiring
Type A
includes no terminal blocks. Combination line starters are factory wired and assembled in the structure in the most efficient arrangement. Auxiliary devices can be supplied wired or unwired as specified. All feeder circuit breaker or fusible discon-nect units are in this classification.
Type B
duplicates Type A except that all control wires terminate at blocks on the side or near the bottom of each unit. Load terminals are all conve-niently located adjacent to the control terminal blocks on size 1 units only. Plug-in type terminal blocks are stan-dard for all control wiring.
Type C
all factory supplied control terminals and load terminals for size 1 and 2 starters are brought to a master terminal block located in the structure.
30.2-2
For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent Technologies
General Description
Sheet 1272
Structures
Standard Structure — Side View
Construction
The standard vertical structure is 90 inches (2286.0 mm) high and 20 inches (508.0 mm) wide. Front mounted only structures can be either 16 inches (406.4 mm) or 21 inches (533.4 mm) deep. Back-to-back unit mounting is 21 inches (533.4 mm) deep.
The structure framework is made of 12-gauge formed steel channels. The subframes for the front and rear of each structure are welded. These sub-frames are then bolted to longitudinal members to form the complete frame which is rigid and self-supporting. Side, back and roof covers of 14-gauge steel are mounted with screw fasteners for quick and easy removal. All doors are 14-gauge steel with a 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) flange to provide a rigid, secure closure for all openings. Doors mounted on removable pin hinges are provided on all unit compartments. Vertical wireways, top horizontal wireways and bottom horizontal wireways are standard.
The unit pan forms the top barrier of each unit space. In conjunction with the unit wrapper, this provides isolation between adjacent units and wireways. The guide rails are an integral part of this pan and provide precise alignment of the unit stabs on the vertical bus.
Standard Structure Arrangements
Standard structural height is 90 inches (2286.0 mm) with 9-inch (228.6 mm)
horizontal wireways available at top and bottom for wiring. The balance of vertical compartments, 72 inches (1828.8 mm), is available for mounting of control units. This space can pro-vide up to 12 6-inch (152.4 mm) high (X spaces) or any combination thereof.
Note:
In the rear of common vertical bus back-to-back structures, the top horizontal wireway is 15 inches (381.0 mm) high and the bottom wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm). This means that back-to-back structures have only 66 inches (1676.4 mm) 11X of usable space in the rear. 72-inch (1828.8 mm) 12X of mounting space is available with a 3-inch (76.2 mm) bottom wireway. two front mounted only structures can be supplied in a back-to-back configuration, allowing 12X rear usable space (depth dimension will increase).
Special Structures
In addition to the standard 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure, extra wide structures are available in 4-inch (101.6 mm) increments up to 40 inches (1016.0) wide.
Reduced height structures, in incre-ments of 6 inches (152.4 mm) 1X from 90 to 54 inches (2286.0 to 1371.6 mm), are available for applications with limited access.
Another special structure is a transi-tion section between Type W and the
IT.
Series. This structure is 10 inches (254.0 mm) wide to provide for horizontal bus splicing.
Paint
All enclosure parts are thoroughly cleaned and given a phosphatizing treatment to inhibit rust and to prime the metal for the finish coating. A 2 mil thick electrostatic powder paint coat is applied to all surfaces. The paint type and process meets UL 1332 for electri-cal equipment steel enclosures. All exterior enclosure covers and doors are painted ANSI 61 gray (Munsel No. 8.3G/6.10/0.54). For improved interior visibility, the interior of the enclosure and plug-in units are painted white (Munsel No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).
Enclosures
The standard enclosure type is NEMA Type 1 Gasketed General Purpose — Indoor. This enclosure is appropriate for installations with normal atmo-spheric conditions.
The NEMA Type 2 Drip-proof — Indoor employs a special roof panel with a drip shield and water channels. This prevents liquid from dripping onto the front of the control center.
The NEMA Type 3R Rainproof and Sleet Resistant — Outdoor consists of a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure mounted on a special base with an outdoor house erected around and over it. Non-walk-in, walk-in aisle and tunnel types are available.
The NEMA Type 12 Dust-tight and Driptight — Indoor has gasketed material around all doors, door cutouts, cover plates, side, top and back sheets. A gasketed bottom plate is provided with this enclosure. This construction provides maximum protection against airborne matter and dripping liquids.
Indoor enclosures comply with NEC UL 845’s “Two Meter Rule” when the bottom of the MCC is at the same level as the operator’s platform. MCC ele-vated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. Handle exten-sions are optionally available and may be installed on-site.
Vertical Wireway
A vertical wireway is provided in each structure. Located on the right side, it extends the full 90-inch (2286.0 mm) height of the structure. The width of the wireway is 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm) at the rear of the vertical frame members. Overall depth of the wireway is 8 inches (203.2 mm) providing a cross-sectional area of nearly 35 square inches (889.0 square mm) to easily accommodate control and load wiring. Supports are provided at suitable intervals to secure all wiring and cables.
Optional 8-inch (203.2 mm) wide wire-ways are available. This configuration
provides a 64 square inch (1625.6 square
mm) cross sectional area and is ideal for
structures with large starters. Structures
with 8-inch (203.2 mm) wireways are 24-inches (609.6 mm) wide and can only accommodate front mounted units.
The doors swing open 115° and oppo-site to the unit doors for maximum accessibility. The doors are mounted on concealed removable pin hinges for quick detachment and are secured in the closed position by spring-loaded quarter-turn indicating type fastener.
8-Inch (203.2 mm) Wireway
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-3
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent Technologies
General Description
Sheet 1273
Horizontal Wireways
Top Horizontal Wireway
Bottom Horizontal Wireway
The top front horizontal wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm) high and 8 inches (203.2 mm) deep in front mounted only structures and in the front of back-to-back mounted structures. It extends the full width of each structure and is totally isolated from the main horizontal bus. The bottom horizontal wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm) high and extends the full depth of the struc-ture. The entire floor area under the control center is open for unrestricted conduit entry. For top entry, the top wireway can be increased to 15 inches (381.0 mm) high, reducing the bottom wireway height to 3 inches (76.2 mm).
For back-to-back unit mounted, the rear top horizontal wireway is 15 inches (381.0 mm) high and 5 inches (127.0 mm) deep.
All horizontal wireway openings are covered by doors for increased accessibility. Each door is mounted with removable pin hinges to allow quick detachment.
Bus System
The bus system is designed to efficiently distribute power throughout the MCC and provides inherent mechanical strength in the event of faults.
Vertical Bus
Vertical Bus Configuration
The vertical bus provides 3-phase power distribution from the main horizontal bus into the vertical com-partments. The bus is a unique angu-lar configuration with an “L” shape for front mounted only structures and a “Z” shape for back-to-back. These shapes have the inherent mechanical strength to withstand fault stresses. They also provide a smooth stabbing surface for unit connection.
MCC Bus Layout
Due to the high strength capability of the bus bars, bus bracing at 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical is standard. Optional bracing is available at 42,000 and 100,000 amperes rms. Bus braces are molded from a glass-reinforced polyester material which is non-track-ing and impervious to moisture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions.
The vertical bus is available in ratings of 300, 600, 800 and 1200 amperes for front mounted only, and 600, 800 and
1200 amperes for back-to-back mounted.
Vertical bus bars are tin-plated copper only.
Vertical bus of the incoming section will match the horizontal bus when applicable.
Isolation of the Freedom Series 2100 vertical bus compartment from the unit compartment is accomplished by a full height barrier. This is a single sheet of glass-reinforced polyester with cutouts to allow the unit stabs to engage the vertical bus. Snap-in covers are available for the cutout openings to provide total isolation during maintenance procedures.
Isolation Barrier
Standard Isolation Barrier Rear View
30.2-4
For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent Technologies
General Description
Sheet 1274
When insulation and isolation of the vertical bus is required, a
labyrinth design barrier
, as shown on the next page, is available. This barrier is molded glass-reinforced polyester and forms a labyrinth around the bus bars to prevent fault propagation. This design provides maximum protection against phase-to-phase insulation breakdown. Thermal efficiency is maintained by a close tolerance fit between the bus bars and the barrier which minimizes air pockets. The labyrinth barrier is standard for
IT.
MCCs.
An automatic shutter mechanism can be provided with the labyrinth barrier for complete isolation of the vertical bus. The shutter moves auto-matically to cover the stab openings when a unit is removed. This provides maintenance personnel with maxi-mum protection since the vertical bus is never exposed. As the unit is reinserted in the compartment, the shutter moves sideways to uncover the stab openings in the barrier.
Labyrinth Barrier
dc Bus
24 Vdc vertical bus is provided in back structure to power each unit and provide vertical ground bus connection. Bus (dc) is 50 ampere rated, tin-plated copper.
dc Bus
Horizontal Bus
Horizontal Bus
The main horizontal bus provides 3-phase power distribution from the incoming line or primary disconnect device to each vertical structure in the motor control center. The bus bars are mounted in a vertical plane, edge to edge. This mounting produces an exceptionally strong assembly, able to withstand high fault current stresses.
Standard horizontal bus bracing is 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical. Optional bracing is available at 100,000 amperes rms. Bus braces are molded from high strength glass-reinforced polyester material which is non-tracking and impervious to moisture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions.
The main horizontal bus is rated at 600 amperes as standard with ratings of 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 amperes optionally available. Tin-plated
copper bus bars are supplied as standard. Silver-plated copper is also available.
Note:
3200 ampere horizontal bus available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65°C rise above 40°C ambient only.
The horizontal main bus is isolated from the top horizontal wireway compartment by an isolation barrier. This two-piece steel barrier extends to the full width of each vertical structure. The two-piece design allows access to bus connections without the removal of the entire barrier, for added mainte-nance convenience. The bus bar layout permits front access to all bus con-nections. This allows maintenance personnel to make splices and check splice bolt torques from the front of the structure.
Neutral Assemblies
Neutral Bus (Bottom)
For 3-phase, 4-wire applications, a neutral landing pad is provided as standard. This is a 100% rated neutral. As an option, half or fully rated neutral bus can be supplied in the bottom of the entire MCC.
Ground Bus
Ground Bus (Top)
Copper ground bus rated 300 amperes 1/4-inch x 3/4-inch (6.4 mm x 19.1 mm) is supplied as standard. Mounting is across the top of each vertical structure in the horizontal wireway. The bus can also be mounted across the bottom when the bottom 9 inches (228.6 mm) are not occupied by units or master terminal blocks. A 1/4-inch x 2-inch (6.4 mm x 50.8 mm) copper vertical ground bus rated 600 amperes is optional.
225 ampere 1/4-inch x 3/4-inch (6.4 mm x 19.1 mm) vertical tin-plated only copper ground bus is available. Located in the vertical bus area, it provides direct starter unit grounding.
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-5
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent Technologies
General Description
Sheet 1275
Units
General
Starter units are combination type
employing a linestarter and a disconnect
device of proven capability. The disconnect device can be a motor circuit protector, circuit breaker or fusible switch. Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type HMCP motor circuit protector is furnished as standard.
The HMCP and starter combination has a 65,000 rms symmetrical ampere short-circuit current rating as standard at 480 V.
Starter units are available with optional 100,000 ampere short-circuit current rating. Series C thermal-magnetic circuit breakers (65 kAIC, or optional 100 kAIC) for starter units are also available.
The fusible switch disconnect device is the Type K. It is a quick-make, quick-break, visible blade switch with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual element, rejection type, NEMA Class J or R fuses. Rejection fuse clips for Class RK-5 fuses are standard. Power fuses are not included as standard.
Both breaker and fuse selection must take into consideration the total short-circuit capacity of the system to which the control center is connected.
Each starter unit includes a tin-plated copper corrosion-resistant safety ground stab that makes connection before the power stabs engage the vertical bus.
Units — Starters
FVNR Size 1
IT.
starter units are equipped with
IT.
electromechanical starters and contac-tors NEMA Sizes 1 – 7. The advanced microprocessor-based OL relay pro-vides Class 10, 20 and 30 overload, phase loss and phase unbalance pro-tection. These features can be enabled and disabled using adjustment dials on the starter.
Units — ac Drives
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Adjustable Frequency Drives
are avail-able from .5 hp to 1100 hp for control of standard ac motors in processes that benefit from the ability to change motor speed. Use of Inverter Duty motors is recommended. Controllers are available to handle constant torque applications, such as conveyors and crushers, and variable torque applica-tions, such as fans and pumps. Control schemes are available for volts/Hz, open loop vector and closed loop vector models. SVX9000 drive units include as standard: line reactors and a door-mounted keypad. Units up to 150 hp VT have a standard output reactor for V/DT filtering. MVX drive units include as standard: a line reac-tor, viewing window for drive display, and an output filter. All drive structures are bus connected which allows for expansion of the MCC on both sides of the structure. A wide range of AFD features and options are available to meet the requirements of most appli-cations. AFDs are available in NEMA 1A.
Units — Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
SSRV Starter 135 A
IT.
Solid-State Reduced Voltage (SSRV) Starters are designed to reduce the inrush current to a motor during starting and limit the amount of available start-ing torque, thus reducing mechanical wear and utility demand requirements. The amount of starting current is field adjustable to match the specific requirements of all applications.
IT.
SSRV Controllers are available with a wide variety of standard features: Kick start, soft stop, phase loss and stall protection.
IT.
SSRV Starters are 30 – 70% smaller than competitive designs.
Typical applications include conveyors, compressors, machine tools, pumps and fans.
Feeder Tap Units
250 A 6-Inch Unit
Feeder tap units may contain either circuit breakers or fusible switches. Drawout breaker units include the fixed trip Type ED, single-mounted in ratings through 125 amperes and the interchangeable trip Types J250 and HKD single-mounted through 250 and 400 amperes respectively. Larger Series C circuit breakers with ratings to 2500 A are fixed mounted.
Fusible feeder tap units utilize the Cutler-Hammer Type K visible blade disconnect switch. Fused switches are mounted in drawout units through 400 amperes. Fixed mounted switch ratings of 600 and 800 amperes are also available.
All switches are supplied with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual-element rejection type. Types of fuses include Class J, R or L. Power fuses are not supplied as standard.
30.2-6
For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent Technologies
General Description
Sheet 1276
Stab Assembly
Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
A tin-plated copper alloy stab incor-porates the ultimate in mechanical simplicity to provide precise control of contact pressure on the bus. This ensures a positive connection, yet permits easy unit insertion and withdrawal. Self-aligning stabs are mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic insulation block which totally shrouds each stab and absolutely ensures positive alignment of the stabs with the vertical bus. The insulation block is also an integral part of the phase-to-phase isolation system. Power wiring is welded to the stabs and is totally contained within the unit enclosure. This means the vertical bus compart-ment is completely free of wiring for maximum safety and reliability.
Stab assemblies are accurately matched to the electrical requirements of each individual unit and are provided in 60, 150, 300 or 400 ampere ratings (plug-in through Size 5).
In addition to the 3-phase power stabs there is a 24 Vdc stab and a ground stab. The 24 Vdc stab includes a fuse-less crowbar circuit which provides control power protection and unit isolation when a short circuit is created. When a short occurs in the control circuit the crowbar feature will interrupt the power in a safe manner. The control power will auto-matically be restored when the short circuit is removed. Units that use Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer QCPort communication include a communica-tion stab.
Handle Mechanism
Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanism
The handle mechanism is designed to provide a high mechanical leverage so that little effort is required to operate any device.
The standard handle mechanism is a vertical motion type device with four positions; ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET. Only circuit breaker types have tripped and reset positions. It is securely mounted to the front of the unit and mechanically connected to the breaker or fusible switch, eliminating alignment problems. It provides a positive indica-tion of the breaker or switch position, even with the door open.
Unit Insertion Interlock
The handle and exterior front panel are molded from the same plastic material as the device panel. A textured surface preserves the appearance. The ON position indicator is at the top and is a bright red. The OFF/RESET position is at the bottom and is bright green. The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is in the middle, between the ON and OFF position. All position indicator colors contrast with the black background and are highly visible even at considerable distances. The operating handle is designed for rugged duty and solid operator feel.
Padlocking Bar
The handle mechanism provides several safety features:
■
In the ON position, an interlock prevents the unit door from being opened. A door interlock defeater screw located to the right of the handle is provided to enable autho-rized maintenance personnel access to the units when required.
■
The unit insertion interlock is located to the left of the operating handle. The interlock must be in the locked position in order to turn the discon-nect on. When the interlock is in the locked position, the unit cannot be withdrawn or inserted.
■
To ensure that units are not energized accidentally or by unauthorized per-sonnel, the handle mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. Sufficient space is available for a maximum of three padlocks. Where critical processes are involved and to prevent unauthorized shutdown, the handle mechanism can be modified to enable padlocking in the ON position.
Each unit has a safe lock position. This interlock will lock the unit in a position off the 480 volt bus and ensure the unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn.
CA08104001E For more information visit:
www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-7
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent Technologies
General Description
Sheet 1277
Device Panel
Unit Device Panel
The device panel can accommodate up to 5 membrane buttons (including reset) and 7 LED indicating lights. These devices are a part of the handle mechanism. The location of this device ensures access to all parts of the unit for maintenance.
Nameplates
Unit nameplates are engraved with 3/16-inch (4.8 mm) high white lettering on a black background. They are heat and crack resistant to eliminate the need for replacement. Nameplates are mounted with stainless steel self-tapping screws.
Unit Wrapper
Plug-in Unit Wrapper
The unit wrapper back is fabricated of 14-gauge steel. After fabrication, it is cleaned and given a rust inhibiting phosphatizing treatment. The finish on a unit wrapper is a baked Munsel No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23 white. This is highly durable finish, gloss-white in color to increase visibility within the unit and facilitate wiring and maintenance procedures.
The unit wrapper consists of a three-sided rugged steel shell including the mounting base for the unit compo-nents. The smallest unit measures 13-3/4 inches (349.3 mm) wide, 8 inches (203.2 mm) deep and 6 inches (152.4 mm) high. Units increase in 6-inch (152.4 mm) increments to a maximum height of 72 inches (1828.8 mm).
The unit wrapper is designed to provide ample space for cable entry from the wireway to the unit.
The unit wrapper has two mounting rails, one on each side, which support the unit in the structure. They engage guide rails located near the top of each unit space. This mounting rail system produces minimum friction and allows units to be inserted and withdrawn easily. The guide rails also give precise alignment to the unit for accurate stab-bing on the vertical bus.
Terminal Blocks
A side mounted, six-circuit, latching pull-apart terminal block is standard on units with NEMA Type B or C wiring. This industrial grade Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer MCC terminal block provides solid electrical connections while con-serving space and making installation and maintenance easier.
Terminal blocks are mounted in knock-outs on the vertical wireway side of the unit housing affording greater access to the unit compartment and interior components. The two-piece terminal block snap-locks together to ensure permanent circuit continuity.
Side-Mounted Latching Terminal Block
Heavy-duty rising box terminals are of a design which eliminates loose connections caused by expansion and contracting of the conductor as the current is switched on and off. This unique design maintains constant pressure as the wire expands and con-tracts. This 300 V, 15 A rated terminal block will accept 12 AWG stripped wires. All terminal block conductors are fully shielded for added safety and cleanliness.
FVNR, FVR, 2-speed and SSRV starter units have 11 terminal blocks running front to back which are used for starter control function. Additional 6-point control terminal blocks run top to bottom and are used for auxiliary con-tacts and other auxiliary components. All other units have only the 6-point latching blocks.
A 12-inch (304.8 mm) high (2X-space) starter unit accommodates up to four side-mounted terminal blocks plus the 11-point block, providing a maximum of 35-points. Larger units accommo-date three additional 6-point terminal blocks for every additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) 1X-space of unit height 6-inch (152.4 mm) units accommodate one 6-point side-mounted terminal block, plus the 11-point block providing a total of 17 points.
Interface Module
Control connections to the starter using the 11-pin terminal block is made through a field interface module. The field interface modules are avail-able as either 24 Vdc or 120 Vac devices. The field interface module, device panel, starter and dc bus are connected inside the unit using pre-made cable assemblies. These cables have snap-lock keyed connectors on both ends to ensure an accurate and reliable connection. Cables are 1000 V rated TeflonT insulated white wire aux-iliary contacts. Other control devices are wired using 16 AWG control wire. Rated 105ºC, the flame retardant thermoplastic insulated wire is red. Power wiring is black and sized to carry the maximum full load current of the starter unit.
30.2-8
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesGeneral Description
Sheet 1278
Motor/Load Terminal Blocks
Load Terminal Block
As an option, starter units up to NEMA Size 4 and other unit up to 180 amperes, can be provided with motor/load ter-minal blocks. These terminals are fix mounted to the MCC structure and are connected to the control device through an additional set of unit stabs.
This ensures the rapid change out of units without having to disconnect the motor/load leads.
Unit Doors
6-Inch (152.4 mm) Unit Door
Unit doors are formed of 14-gauge steel with a 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) flange on all four sides. The flange adds rigid-ity to the door and provides a surface to contain door gasketing. Cutouts are made in the door as required to accommodate the operating handle and device panel. The doors are cleaned, phosphatized and given a finish of gray, baked on enamel ANSI 61.
The doors will open 115° opposite to the wireway doors permitting optimum access to the unit compart-ment. The doors are mounted on removable concealed pin hinges. This permits quick removal of any door in a vertical structure without disturbing adjacent doors.
Doors 2X and larger are held closed with a minimum of two quarter-turn indicat-ing type fasteners. They securely hold the door in the closed position, yet allow quick and easy access to the unit when required. The fasteners provide a visual indication of the latched position. The head slot of the fastener is designed to prevent screwdriver slippage.
Spring-Loaded Unit Door 1/4 Turn Latch
OptionsStarter and feeder tap units can be modified to meet a variety of specifica-tion requirements. Some typical com-ponents which can be added include: control power transformers with two primary and one secondary control fuses, control relays, CEP7 or IQ 500 (solid-state overload) relays, ground fault relays, current transformers, extra electrical interlocks, pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, circuit breaker shunt trip or undervoltage release and auxiliary switches. In most cases, one of these modifications does not increase starter unit size.
Additional EquipmentIn addition to motor starter and feeder units, additional equipment can be supplied including the following:
■ Single-phase dry-type distribution transformers in ratings of .5, .75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 and 45 kVA.
■ 3-phase dry-type distribution trans-formers in ratings of 9, 15, 25, 30 and 45 kVA.
■ Lighting panelboards with up to 42 circuits with either plug-in branch breakers or bolt-on branch breakers, 120/240 V, 120/208 V or 480 V, single- or 3-phase.
■ Current limiting reactors with ohmic values of .01, .015, .02 and .025, and ampere ratings of 600, 800, 1000 and 1200.
■ Metering equipment including the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ family of solid-state power monitors, voltmeters and ammeters.
■ Active Harmonic Correction Units.■ Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
(TVSS) units.
■ Power factor correction capacitors.■ Automatic transfer switches.■ DeviceNet Communications.■ PowerNet Communications.■ Modbus Communications:
❑ Modbus TCP❑ Modbus RTU
■ PanelMate industrial Operator Interface.
■ Industrial PCs.
Control and Load Terminations
Master Terminal Blocks at Bottom(Class C Wiring)
For NEMA Type A wiring, each unit is assembled and devices interwired. Ter-minal blocks are not supplied and con-trol and load wiring is internal to the unit.
For NEMA Type B wiring, control wires are terminated at blocks within the unit. Refer to the discussion of units for types of terminal blocks available.
For NEMA Type C-S wiring, control, and size 1 and 2 starter load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located at the top or bottom of each vertical structure.
The mounting location of the master terminal block in front mounted only structures is in the existing horizontal wireway space at the top or at the bot-tom as shown above. When mounting is made in an incoming line section, 12 inches (304.8 mm) of unit space must be used. When mounting is made in the rear of back-to-back mounted structures, 6 inches (152.4 mm) of unit space must be used at the bottom and 12 inches (304.8 mm) at the top.
Master terminal blocks are rack mounted to permit removal of entire assembly for ease of wiring during installation and maintenance.
For NEMA Type C-M wiring control and size 1 and 2 starter load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located in a separate marshaling structure.
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-9June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesGeneral Description
Sheet 1279
Incoming LineIncoming line cables entering the MCC from either the top or bottom can be easily terminated onto main lugs or connected to a main disconnect. All incoming line sections comply with NEC wiring bending requirements as adopted by UL.
Main Lugs Only (MLO)Up to 1200 ampere rated horizontal bus, cables, up to four per phase, are termi-nated on crimp or screw lugs mounted on adapters solidly bolted to fully rated vertical bus. Top entry cables are terminated at the top of the MCC and bottom entry cables are conveniently terminated near the bottom. Table 30.2-76 shows spacing requirements for various cable configurations. MLO termination for 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 amperes requires a full vertical section.
Note: 3200 ampere main lugs only available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65°C rise above 40°C ambient only.
Main DisconnectsIncoming cables may also be easily terminated on a main circuit breaker or fused switch. A variety of molded case or encased circuit breakers are available. Tables 30.2-54 through 30.2-59 show spacing requirements for various main devices.
Metering
IQ Analyzer
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer IQ family of metering and power monitors includes:
IQ 320 microprocessor-based 3-phase power monitor replaces the traditional ammeter, voltmeter and instrument switches. Displays phase currents, voltage, L-L, L-N, power — real and reactive apparent, power factor,frequency, energy, watthours, varhours, VA-hours.
IQ 200 includes all of the functions of the IQ 320 Meter. The door mounted display is smaller, making the IQ 200 ideal for use on individual starter and drive units.
IQ DP-4000 includes all of the functions of the IQ 320 plus THD readings for voltage and current. Additionally, the IQ DP-4130 includes contact inputs and outputs. This device is ideal for incom-ing line monitoring.
IQ Analyzer provides extensive metering, power quality analysis, remote input monitoring, control relaying, analog input/outputs, and is communications capable. A display provides the flexi-bility of exhibiting large characters with high visibility and small characters for detailed descriptions.
These IQ power monitors each contain their own voltage power pack for sys-tems up to 600 V. Therefore, separate potential transformers are not required. Either two or three separate current transformers must be used. All IQ power monitors are communications capable. Refer to Section 3 for further details.
Power Xpert is a meter available with communication features for power management and system software integration in addition to a Web inter-face. Customers and facility personnel can view the metering data using a standard PC Web browser. The new platform offers advanced functionality like transient capture, high sampling rate, open communications, Web server gateway, field upgradable firmware, expandable memory and optional I/O.
Power Supplies
Dual Power Supply Bucket
Cutler-Hammer Power Supply Units feature high outrush capability, self-protecting 24 Vdc output and input voltage range from 120 – 480 volts. Power supplies are switching power supplies which meet semicondcutor industry spec FH7. This ensures the power supply will ride through a 50% voltage sag for 200 ms. Cutler-Hammer power supplies meet this spec at 150% of load. Each power supply in a unit has its own disconnect switch.
Surge — TVSS
TVSS (Clipper Power System) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Visor Series TVSS units feature advanced thermodynamic fusing technology and intelligent monitor options in 12, 18-inch space factors. All TVSS units (100 – 500 kA) meet UL 449, 2nd edition and UL 1283. Internal fuse protection is up to 200 kAIC.
Standard MCC offering includes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C contact, alarm enable and disable.
Automatic Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Switch
ATVI designs include IQ Transfer door-mounted microprocessor-based moni-toring device for use in open transition transfer switches where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situa-tions is essential. The IQ Transfer is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be used with Cutler-Hammer transfer switches. This device provides the operator with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. The IQ Transfer continuously monitors either single-phase or 3-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the load.
30.2-10
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesGeneral Description
Sheet 1280
Figure 30.2-1. Clean Control Center Installation Diagram
Source
XFMR
Alternate CTPlacement
Typical CTPlacement
HarmonicCorrection
Unit
Load(s)Harmonic CorrectionEaton’s Cutler-Hammer Clean Control Center utilizes a harmonic correction unit to provide harmonic cancellation directly on the motor control center horizontal bus. The harmonic correc-tion unit senses the load current and injects into the ac lines a synthesized waveform that is inverted compared to the remaining signal. The result is a clean waveform as seen by the upstream electrical system. Single or multiple harmonic correction units may be applied within a Clean Control Center providing an economical solution to excessive harmonics due to ac drives or other non-linear loads. Use of the Clean Control Center will provide compliance to the most stringent 5% Total Demand Distortion (TDD) requirements of IEEE 519. Clean Control Center assemblies include a 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCC structure, Active Harmonic Correction Unit, Current Transformers and a door-mounted digital interface panel.
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-11June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesGeneral Description
Sheet 1281
Communications
GeneralEaton’s IT. Motor Control Center (MCC) is designed to allow multiple protocol communications. These include, but are not limited to, a DeviceNet and Cutler-Hammer’s PowerNet. DeviceNet is a control field network that allows users to control and monitor devices in the MCC. PowerNet is a power monitoring network which allows users to monitor meter breakers and other power distribution equipment. The use of these networks significantly reduces field wiring and speeds up installation and commissioning of the motor control center.
Communications — DeviceNet
DeviceNet
IT. MCCs are available with DeviceNet Communications. DeviceNet is a device level open communication network linking DeviceNet-capable control products, such as IT. Starters, Adjustable Frequency Drives, operator interfaces, I/O blocks, IT. soft starters and iPCs. These products are prewired in the MCC with DeviceNet cable (see Figure 30.2-2). Available control and monitoring features of IT. Starters include:
■ ON/OFF control.■ Control voltage.■ Trip reset.■ Trip indication.■ Cause of trip.■ % Thermal capacity.■ 3-phase or average motor current.■ Trip warning.■ Breaker status.■ Ground fault indication.
Figure 30.2-2. DeviceNet Using QCPort
QCPort DeviceNet Adapter
DeviceNet communications to starter and I/O blocks can be more cost-effec-tively applied using QCPort connec-tions. QCPort allows multiple devices to be connected to a single DeviceNet node, reducing the number of scanner cards that may be required in an appli-cation. A QCPort DeviceNet adapter is located in the power supply unit of a structure and connects a maximum of
63 starters that share a single DeviceNet node (see Figure 30.2-2). If motorcur-rent, status and control information is required then one QCPort DNA is required for every 21 starters. If status and control information only is required then one QCPort DNA is required for every 63 starters. An MCC with QCPort devices includes a communications bus located in the vertical bus area of the structure. Each QCPort unit has a com-munication stab that connects the unit with the communication bus when the unit is inserted.
The DeviceNet specification is con-trolled by the Open Device Vendors Association (ODVA). The DeviceNet system can be controlled from:
■ iPC (industrial personal computer) PC-based control software.
■ DeviceNet scanner cards designed for leading PLC and DCS systems.
Power Supply
I/O (optional)
QCPortCommunicationBus
QCPort Cover Control Module
DeviceNetCable
DeviceNet Adapter
Interface Module
30.2-12
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesGeneral Description
Sheet 1282
Communications — Modbus TCPIT. starters are available with Modbus TCP communications via Ethernet. Modbus TCP is an application layer communication protocol linking Mod-bus TCP capable products, such as IT. starters, adjustable frequency drives, operator interfaces, I/O blocks, IT. soft starters and iPCs. These products are pre-wired in the MCC with Ethernet cable connecting the various Modbus TCP Gateways to an unmanned switch located in the MCC (see Figure 30.2-3). Available control and monitoring features of IT. starters include:
■ ON/OFF control.■ Control voltage.■ Trip reset.■ Trip indication.■ Cause of trip.■ % Thermal capacity.■ 3-phase or average motor current.■ Trip warning.■ Breaker status.■ Ground fault indication.
Modbus communications can be more cost-effectively applied using QCPort connections. QCPort allows multiple starters and other I/O devices to be connected to a single Modbus node.A Modbus to QCPort Adapter is located in the power supply unit of a structure and connects a maximum of 1024 registers to the network. Typical starter applications use four registers per starter. Additional register information can be added or deleted as the application demands. An MCC with QCPort devices includes a communication bus located in the vertical bus area of the structure. Each QCPort unit has a communica-tion stab that connects the unit with the communication bus when the unit is inserted. Each of the QCPort Adapters are connected to a central-ized industrial switch via Ethernet cable. One port on the switch will be available for customer connection.
Communications — PowerNet
IQ Analyzer
The IT. MCC is available with the PowerNet communications devices to the following: the IQ family of metering devices, addressable relays and energy sentinels.
PLCsProgrammable Controllers can be mounted in the IT. MCCs in a wide variety of configurations. Popular mounting configurations include small PLCs unit mounted to replace relays, medium sized PLCs with I/O for control of an MCC lineup, and remote I/O drops mounted in an MCC and con-nected to the main CPU via coaxial cable. Due to the flexibility of PLCs and the wide variety of applications and configurations, the IT. MCC is designed to meet the mounting requirements of most applications.
Monitoring and Diagnostic ToolsThe IT. MCC allows a user to monitor and troubleshoot the MCC and the connected loads.
The network configuration tool is CH Studio. This tool is used in conjunction with an MCC that is already configured for communications. This tool can be run on a customer iPC/PC or run on an iPC mounted in the motor control cen-ter. CH Studio provides a graphical interface that shows status of all units in an elevation view. It allows the user to select the behavior of individual starters such as:
■ Custom I/O configurations.■ Loss of communication behavior
(Stop, Forward, Rev, Maintain Last State).
■ Verify overload settings.■ 2-wire or 3-wire control.■ Fault indication.
Additional Services
Startup AssistanceTo ensure complete customer satisfac-tion and to expedite equipment startup for motor control centers, this service provides a factory-trained representa-tive at the job site during equipment energization. This service is provided on a fixed price basis. In addition to factory directed startup, the standard equipment warranty is extended for a period of 24 months. This service is especially beneficial when solid-state equipment is incorporated within the MCC due to the flexibility in adjusting solid-state equipment for each application.
Maintenance and Operational TrainingA full range of Training and Operational Training programs is available for all types of MCC mounted equipment. In addition, Preventative Maintenance programs are available to ensure years of trouble-free operation.
Seismic QualificationSeismic testing has been completed for IT. MCCs. When specified, IT. MCCs are seismically qualified to meet the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC).
Note: Contact Eaton for availability of seismically qualified MCC.
RetrofitsExisting installations can many times benefit from some of the “new” tech-nology equipment available in today’s MCCs. Eaton offers a full range of retrofit capabilities to upgrade existing MCC lineups. Examples include: vacuum contactors, reduced voltage solid-state starters, solid-state meter-ing and solid-state overload protec-tion. Starter retrofit kits for selective competitor MCCs are also available. Consult factory for availability.
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-13June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesGeneral Description
Sheet 1283
Figure 30.2-3. Modbus TCP Using QCPort
ModbusAdapter
PowerSupply
EthernetSwitch
QCPortCommunication
Bus
QCPortCover Control
Module
I/OOptional
InterfaceModule
InterfaceModule
30.2-14
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesGeneral Description
Sheet 1284
IT. 2100 Series Motor Control Center
IT. 2100 Series Motor Control Center
Quick Reference Layout Guide IndexDevice Space Requirements Table Page
Combination Starters, Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-2 30.2-15
Combination Starters, Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-16 30.2-19
MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-25 30.2-22
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-27 30.2-23
Option Groups for Combination Starters, Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-33 30.2-26
Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-54 30.2-29
Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-59 30.2-31
Lighting Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-60 30.2-31
Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-63 30.2-31
Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-64 30.2-32
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-65 30.2-32
Current Limiting Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-66 30.2-32
TVSS (Clipper SuperVisor Power System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-67 30.2-32
DeviceNet Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-68 30.2-32
Metering and Protection Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-71 30.2-33
Harmonic Correction — Clean Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-72 30.2-33
Standard Structures and Structure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-73 30.2-35
Structure Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-74 30.2-35
Bus Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-75 30.2-36
Main Lugs Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-76 30.2-36
Control Power Supply Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-78 30.2-37
Motor Circuit Protector, Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-81 30.2-38
Starter Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-82 30.2-39
Section Views/Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — 30.2-39
Layout Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-83 30.2-43
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-15June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1285
Technical DataTable 30.2-1. Short Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480 Volts)
Table 30.2-2. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Motor Circuit Protector Ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efficiency) motors. Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
1 Standard Combination Starter Units with HMCP Magnetic Only disconnect have short circuit ratings of 65,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional HMCP combination starter units are available with 100,000 amperes at 480 volts.
2 Optional Combination Starter Units with Thermal-Magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 amperes or 100,000 amperes at 480 volts.
3 6-inch (152.4 mm)/1X unit is standard.4 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard.5 1200 ampere HMCP frame available in 11X 66-inch (1676.4 mm).6 Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.7 30-inch (762.0 mm) space needed for Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker.8 Requires 36-inch (914.4 mm) wide structure.i 36-inch (914.4 mm) space needed for Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker.Note: For HMCP continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.2-81 on Page 30.2-38.
Short Circuit Protective Device
Combination StarterFV and RV (kA)
Solid-StateReduced Voltage (kA)
Adjustable Frequency Drives (kA)
HMCP Motor Circuit Protector (Standard Rating)HMCP Motor Circuit Protector (Optional Rating)
65100
65100
65100
MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Standard Rating)MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Optional Rating)Fusible Switch
65100100
65—100
65100100
NEMA Size
Maximum Horsepower HMCPE Frame 1
MCCBFrame 2
IT. Unit Size
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V Inches (mm) X Space
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Type T2061 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 225 E 6 (152.4) 3 1X
2 10 15 25 25 25 225 E 6 (152.4) 3 1X
3 25 30 50 50 50 225 E 12 (304.8) 4 2X
4 40 50 75 100 100 250 J 12 (304.8) 4 2X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 30 (762.0) 5X
6 25150
100—200
250—300
300350400
400——
600 HLD/LDC 5 48 (1219.2) 8X
—1200
—HND
—72 (1828.8) 6
—12X
7 — 300 — 600 600 1200 HND 72 (1828.8) 6 12X
Full Voltage Reversing Type T2161 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 225 E 12 (304.8) 2X
2 10 15 25 25 25 225 E 12 (304.8) 2X
3 25 30 50 50 50 225 E 18 (457.2) 3X
4 40 50 75 100 100 250 J 24 (609.6)30 (762.0) 7
4X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 60 (1524.0) 10X
6125150
100200
250300
300400
400—
6001200
HLD/LDCHND 8
72 (1828.8) 672 (1828.8) 8
12X12X 8
Two-Speed One Winding, Constant/Variable Torque Type T9461 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 225 E 12 (304.8) 2X
2 10 15 25 25 25 225 E 18 (457.2) 3X
3 25 30 50 50 50 225 E 24 (609.6) 4X
4 40 50 75 100 100 225 J 24 (609.6) 4X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 72 (1828.8) 6 12X
Two-Speed Two Winding, Constant/Variable Torque Type T9561 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 150 HFD/FDC 12 (304.8) 2X
2 10 15 25 25 25 150 HFD/FDC 18 (457.2) 3X
3 25 30 50 50 50 150 HFD/FDC 24 (609.6) 4X
4 30 40
40 50
60 75
75100
100—
150 250
HFD/FDCHJD/JDC 24 (609.6) i 4X
5 50 75
60100
100150
125200
150200
250 400
HJD/JDCHKD/KDC 72 (1828.8) 6 12X
30.2-16
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1286
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Start Controller — S701Eaton’s solid-state reduced voltage soft start controller uses a manual motor protector, main disconnect in conjunction with the soft start controller. Units can be supplied with one controller or with four or six controllers fed from one main disconnect.
Table 30.2-3. Soft Start Controller — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — HMCP — S752Eaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. soft starter has three 24 Vdc inputs and one transistor output. IT. soft starter units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Table 30.2-4. Standard Duty Ratings — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Table 30.2-5. Severe Duty Ratings — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Table 30.2-6. Control Options
1 Bypass starter or isolation contactor options will fit in (3X) 18-inch (457.2 mm) units.
Table 30.2-7. Group-Mounted Controller Option
AmpereRating
Maximum Horsepower HMCPValues
Unit SizeInches (mm)208 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
3.51525
135
135
2 7.515
21020
71530
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower HMCPValues208 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
4.4 9162750
54 0.75 2 3 7.515
1 2 3 7.515
2 5102030
3 7.5102540
715305070
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower HMCPValues208 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
4.4 9162750
54 0.75 2 2 3 7.5
1 2 2 510
2 5 51020
3 7.5 7.51530
715305070
Extra 50 VA Control Power TransformerLine or Load MOV ProtectionBypass Starter 1Isolation Contractor 1
MaximumHorsepower perUnit at 480 V
Numberof Units
Unit SizeInches (mm)
227.57.5
4646
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)24 (609.6)36 (914.4)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-17June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1287
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — HMCPEaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection■ A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load
amperes.■ A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load
amperes. (15% more current.)■ IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger
IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
Table 30.2-8. Standard Duty Ratings — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
1 Standard duty ampere rating. See Table 30.2-11 below.2 Consult factory for width of unit.3 Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 30.2-9. Option Sizing — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4 Option adds 6 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
Table 30.2-10. Control Options
5 Option fits in standard unit space.6 Option adds 6 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
Table 30.2-11. Standard Duty Ratings
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower or (kW) HMCP/MCCBFrame
Unit SizeInches (mm)208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
HMCP 1
37 66
65 10 15
10 20
10 20
10 20
15 30
18.5 30
20 40
25 50
30 50
30 60
100 100
12 (304.8)
105 135 135
110 30 40—
30 40—
30 40—
40 50—
45— 55
55— 75
60 75—
75100—
75100—
100 125—
150 150 250
18 (457.2)
180 180 240 304 304
200 — 50 60 75—
— 60 75100—
60— 75100—
60— 75100—
— 75110
132
— 90132
160
—125150200—
—150200250—
150—200250—
150— 200 300—
250 400 400 400 600
36 (914.4)
360 420 500
290 125150—
125150—
125—150
150—200
160200250
200220250
—300350
—350400
300350450
350 450 500
600 600 600
54 (1371.6)
650 720 850
290 200200—
200250—
200250300
250300350
315—375
375—500
450500600
500600700
600600700
600 700 900
120012001200
72 (1828.8)
1000 290 — — 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 2000 72 (1828.8) 23
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect 1
37 66
65 10 15
10 20
10 20
10 20
15 30
18.5 30
20 40
25 50
30 50
30 60
150 150
12 (304.8)
105 135
110 30 40
30 40
30 40
40 50
45 55
55 75
60 75
75100
75100
100 125
150 225
18 (457.2)
180 180 240 304 304
200 — 50 60 75—
— 60 75100—
— 60 75100—
— 60 75100—
— 75110132—
— 90132160—
—125150—200
—150200—250
150—200—250
150— 200— 300
250 250 400 400 600
36 (914.4)
360 420 500
290 125150—
125150—
125—150
150—200
160200250
200220250
—300350
—350400
300350450
350 450 500
600 600 600
72 (1828.8)
650 650 720 850
290 200—200—
200—250—
—200250300
—250300350
—315—375
—375—500
450—500600
500—600700
600—600700
600— 700 900
800120012001200
72 (1828.8)
1000 290 — — 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 2000 72 (1828.8) 23
IT. Width(mm)
Disconnect Type
Starter Size
Option Unit Size 4
StructureWidth
Isolating Contactor 65110110
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
1,2,33,45
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
20 (508.0)32 (812.8)48 (1219.2)
Bypass Starter 65110110
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
1,2,33,45
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
24 (609.6)32 (812.8)48 (1219.2)
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 56
24 Vdc Control 5Line or Load MOV Protection 5Pump Control Option 5DeviceNet Communications Module 56
Ramp Current % of FLA
Ramp Time
StartsPer Hour
Similar to Starting Method
300%500%350%
30 Seconds10 Seconds20 Seconds
333
Soft StartFull VoltageWye Delta
480%390%300%
20 Seconds20 Seconds20 Seconds
234
80% RVAT65% RVAT50% RVAT
30.2-18
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1288
IT06 — Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — HMCPEaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection■ A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load
amperes.■ A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load
amperes. (15% more current.)■ IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger
IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
Table 30.2-12. Severe Duty Ratings — Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
1 Severe duty ampere rating. See Table 30.2-15 below.2 Consult factory for width of unit.3 Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.9 mm) wide (rear is unusable).Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 30.2-13. Option Sizing — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4 Option adds 6 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
Table 30.2-14. Control Options
5 Option fits in standard unit space.6 Option adds 6 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
Table 30.2-15. Severe Duty Ratings
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower or (kW) HMCP/MCCBFrame
Unit SizeInches (mm)208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
HMCP 1
22 42
65 5 10
5 10
5 10
7.5 15
7.5 18.5
11 22
10 25
15 30
15 30
20 40
100 100
12 (304.8)
65 80 80
110 15— 20
20— 25
20— 25
20— 30
22 37—
30 37—
40— 50
50— 60
50— 60
60— 75
100 100 150
18 (457.2)
115150150192192
200 30— 40— 50
40— 50— 60
30 50—— 60
40 50—— 75
55— 55 90—
55— 75 90—
75100——125
75100——125
100—125—150
100—150—200
150 150 250 250 400
36 (914.4)
240305365420480
290 60 75100125—
75100125150—
—100125—150
—100150—200
110132160200220
132160200220250
150200250300350
200250300350400
—250300350450
—300350450500
400 400 600 600 600
54 (1371.6)
525 290 — — — — — — 350 450 — — 600 72 (1828.8)600 — — — — — — 450 500 500 600 1200 72 (1828.8) 23
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect 1
22 42
65 5 10
5 10
5 10
7.5 15
7.5 18.5
11 22
10 25
15 30
15 30
20 40
150 150
12 (304.8)
65 80
110 15 20
20 25
20 25
20 30
22 37
30 37
40 50
50 60
50 60
60 75
225 225
18 (457.2)
115150192
200 30 40 50
40 50 60
30 50 60
40 50 75
55 55 90
55 75 90
75100125
75100150
100125150
100150200
400 400 400
36 (914.4)
240305
290 60 75
75100
—100
—100
110132
132160
150200
200250
—250
—300
600 800
54 (1371.6)
365420480525
290 100125——
125150——
125—150—
150—200—
160200220—
200220250—
250300350350
300350400450
300350450—
350450500—
1200120012001200
72 (1828.8)
600 290 — — — — — — 450 500 500 600 1200 72 (1828.8) 23
IT. Width (mm)
Disconnect Type
Starter Size
Option Unit Size 4
StructureWidth
Isolating Contactor 65110110
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
1,2,33,45
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
20 (508.0)32 (812.8)48 (1219.2)
Bypass Starter 65110110
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
1,2,33,45
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
HMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCBHMCP, MCCB
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
24 (609.6)32 (812.8)48 (1219.2)
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 56
24 Vdc Control 5Line or Load MOV Protection 5Pump Control Option 5DeviceNet Communications Module 56
Ramp Current %of FLA
Ramp Time
StartsPer Hour
Similar to Starting Method
450%500%350%
30 Seconds10 Seconds65 Seconds
410 3
Soft StartFull VoltageWye Delta
480%390%300%
25 Seconds40 Seconds60 Seconds
4 4 4
80% RVAT65% RVAT50% RVAT
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-19June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1289
Table 30.2-16. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short circuit current.2 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard.3 For top entry of motor cables.4 For bottom entry of motor cables.5 Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.6 Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed fuses.7 Add 12-inch (304.8 mm) space for low speed fuses.
NEMASize
Maximum Horsepower Switch Rating 1
IT. Unit Size
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V Inches (mm) X Space
Full Voltage Non-Reversing — Fusible Type T2041 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 12 (304.8) 2 2X 2
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 12 (304.8) 2 2X 2
3 25 30 50 50 50 100 24 (609.6) 4X
4 40 50 75 100 100 200 30 (762.0) 5X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 3 60 (1524.0) 10X
6 150 200 300 400 400 60066 (1676.4) 472 (1828.0) 3
11X12X
Full Voltage Reversing — Fusible Type T2141 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 18 (457.2) 3X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 18 (457.2) 3X
3 25 30 50 50 50 100 30 (762.0) 5X
4 40 50 75 100 100 200 36 (914.4) 5X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72 (1828.0) 5 12X
6 150 200 300 400 400 600 72 (1828.0) 5 12X
Two-Speed One Winding — Fusible Type T9441 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 18 (457.2) 3X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 18 (457.2) 3X
3 25 25
30 30
— 50
30 50
50 50
60100 36 (914.4) 6X
4 — 40
— 50
— 75
—100
60100
100200 42 (1066.8) 7X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72 (1828.0) 5 12X
Two-Speed Two Winding — Fusible Type T9541 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 18 (457.2) 3X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 18 (457.2) 3X
3
— 25
— 30
— 50
— 50
30 50
60100 30 (762.0) 5X
— 25
— 30
— 50
— 50
30 50
60100 36 (914.4) 6 6X
4— 40
— 50
— 75
—100
60100
100200 36 (914.4) 7 6X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72 (1828.0) 7 12X
30.2-20
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1290
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — Fusible SwitchEaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection■ A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load
amperes.■ A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load
amperes. (15% more current.)■ IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger
IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
Table 30.2-17. Standard Duty Ratings — Fusible 1
1 Standard duty ampere rating. See Table 30.2-19 below.2 Consult factory for unit width.3 Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 30.2-18. Control Options
4 Option fits in standard unit space.
Table 30.2-19. Standard Duty Ratings
Table 30.2-20. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
5 Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower (kW) SwitchRating
Unit SizeInches (mm)
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
37 66
65 10 15
10 20
10 20
10 20
15 30
18.5 30
20 40
25 50
30 50
30 60
30/60 100
18 (457.2)
105 135
110 30 40
30 40
30 40
40 50
45 55
55 75
60 75
75100
75100
100 125
200 200
30 (762.0)
180 240 304 304
200 50 60— 75
60 75—100
60 75100—
60 75100—
75110—132
90132—160
125150—200
150200—250
150200—250
150 200— 300
400 400 400 600
60 (1524.0)
360 420 420 500
290 125—150—
100—125—
125——150
150——200
160200—250
200220—250
——300350
——350400
300—350450
350— 450 500
600 600 800 800
72 (1828.8)
650 720 850
290 200200—
200250—
200250300
250300350
315—375
375—500
450500600
500600700
600600700
600 700 900
120012001200
72 (1828.8)
1000 290 — — 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 1200 72 (1828.8) 23
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 424 Vdc Control 4Line or Load MOV Protection 4Pump Control Option 4DeviceNet Communications Module 4
Ramp Current % of FLA
Ramp Time
StartsPer Hour
Similar to Starting Method
300%500%350%
30 Seconds10 Seconds20 Seconds
333
Soft StartFull VoltageWye Delta
480%390%300%
20 Seconds20 Seconds20 Seconds
234
80% RVAT65% RVAT50% RVAT
IT. Width (mm)
Fused Switch Type(Amperes)
Starter Size
Option Unit SizeInches (mm) 5
Structure WidthInches (mm)
65110110
30/60/100100200
1,2,334
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
400/800600/800800/1200
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
32 (812.8)36 (914.4)64 (1625.6)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-21June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1291
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter — FusibleEaton’s IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has five 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection■ A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load
amperes.■ A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load
amperes. (15% more current.)■ IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger
IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
Table 30.2-21. Severe Duty Ratings — Fusible 1
1 Severe duty ampere rating. See Table 30.2-23 below.2 Consult factory for width of unit.3 Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service factor (SF).
Table 30.2-22. Control Options
4 Option fits in standard unit space.
Table 30.2-23. Severe Duty Ratings
Table 30.2-24. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
5 Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
AmpereRating
IT. Width(mm)
Maximum Horsepower (kW) Switch Rating
Unit SizeInches(mm)
208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 575 V
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
22 42 42
65 5 10—
5 10—
5— 10
7.5— 15
7.5— 18.5
11— 22
10— 25
15— 30
15— 30
20— 40
30/6030/60 100
18 (457.2)
65 80
110 15 20
20 25
20 25
20 30
22 37
30 37
40 50
50 60
50 60
60 75
200 200
30 (762.0)
115115150192
200 — 30 40 50
— 40 50 60
— 30 50 60
— 40 50 75
— 55 55 90
— 55 75 90
75100—125
75100—150
100—125150
100—150200
200 400 400 400
60 (1524.0)
240305365420480480525
290 60 75100125———
75100125150———
—100125——150—
—100150——200—
110132160200220——
132160200220250——
150200250300—350350
200250300350—400450
—250300350—450—
—300350450—500—
600 600 800 800 80012001200
72 (1828.8)
600 290 — — — — — — 450 500 500 600 1200 72 (1828.8) 23
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 424 Vdc Control 4Line or Load MOV Protection 4Pump Control Option 4DeviceNet Communications Module 4
Ramp Current %of FLA
Ramp Time
StartsPer Hour
Similar to Starting Method
450%500%350%
30 Seconds10 Seconds65 Seconds
410 3
Soft StartFull VoltageWye Delta
480%390%300%
25 Seconds40 Seconds60 Seconds
4 4 4
80% RVAT65% RVAT50% RVAT
IT. Width (mm)
FusedSwitch Type(Amperes)
StarterSize
Option Unit SizeInches (mm) 5
StructureWidth Inches (mm)
65110110
30/60/100100200
1,2,334
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)54 (1371.6)
20 (508.0)20 (508.0)20 (508.0)
200290290
400/800600/800800/1200
5,667
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
32 (812.8)36 (914.4)64 (1625.6)
30.2-22
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1292
MVX Adjustable Frequency DrivesMaximum motor lead length is 500 feet (152 m). Drives are dual rated CT and VT with 150% Overload for 1 minute. Standard unit includes disconnect, 1% line reactor, 50 VA CPT, a 1.5% output reactor, and provisions for a control relay. Output reactor is not required if using an inverter duty motor.
■ All Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer MVX units are plug-in for 20-inch (508 mm) wide structures.
■ Maximum motor lead length is 500 feet (152 m).■ Firmly connect each drive chassis to an earthed ground. Grounding conduit
does not provide adequate grounding.■ Use separate conduit for output power conductors and digital and analog
control signals. Within the MCC, care should be taken in routing power and control wiring.
Table 30.2-25. MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 3% line reactors are included in standard unit.Note: 3% line reactors should be used where Power Factor Correction Capacitors are an integral part of the MCC Line Power.
Table 30.2-26. MVX Options — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
MaximumHorsepower
MaximumAmperes
CBType
Standard Unit Space 1
Typical Option Space
Maximum Option Space
HMCP MCCB Dim. X Dim. X Dim. X
208/240 Volt Application 0.5 1.0 2.0
2.5 5.0 7.0
151515
151515
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
3.0 5.0 7.5
10.017.025.0
303050
203050
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)
5X5X5X
460 Volt Application (+/- 10%) 1.0 2.0 3.0
3.0 4.0 5.0
777
151515
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
5.0 7.510.0
8.213.018.0
153030
152525
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)
5X5X5X
Description Space Required
Inches (mm) X
Manual Bypass3% Load Reactor5% Load Reactor
12 (304.8) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4)
2X1X1X
Oversized CPT 100 VA1 Ampere Power Supply
6 (152.4) 6 (152.4)
1X1X
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-23June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1293
SVX9000 1 – 30 hp at 480 V Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive UnitsAll Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, an ac choke, output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. All plug-in units have a built-in Dynamic Braking Circuit, M3 frame. Standard unit drives do not include a CPT.
Note: Output reactor not included on 240 V units. Standard on 380 – 500 V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute.
VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute.
Table 30.2-27. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 For fusible disconnect use typical option unit.Note: Drive units fit into a standard 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide MCC structure.
CT/VTAmperes
Nominalhp CT/VTor (kW)
CB Type1
StandardUnit Space
Typical OptionsUnit Space
Max. Option Unit Space
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim. 1 (X) Dim. (X)
200 – 240 Volts 3.6 4.7 5.6 7
.75 1 1.5 2
7 15 15 15
15 15 15 15
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X3X
30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)
5X5X5X5X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
6X6X6X6X
10162230
3 5 7.510
15 30 50 50
25 40 50 70
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)36 (914.4)
4X4X4X7X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)48 (1219.2)
6X6X6X8X
42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)54 (1371.6)
7X7X7X9X
4357
1520
100100
100125
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
7X7X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)
8X8X
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)
9X9X
380 – 500 Volts 2.5 3 3.5 5
1 1.5 2 3
7 7 7 15
15 15 15 15
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X3X
30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)30 (762.0)
5X5X5X5X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
6X6X6X6X
8111521
5 7.51015
15 30 30 30
15 25 35 50
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X4X
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
6X6X6X6X
42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)42 (1066.8)
7X7X7X7X
273440
202530
50 50100
60 80100
36 (914.4)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
7X7X7X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2)
8X8X8X
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)
9X9X9X
Table 30.2-28. Plug-in Options
2 Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 31 for detailed information.
3 All options will fit in typical and maximum option unit.
4 This option will fit in all units.5 One of these options will fit in 5 –30 hp CT at
480 V frame standard units, 1 – 30 hp CT at 480 V typical and maximum option units.
6 All options will fit in maximum option unit.7 Use with bypass option.8 DB resistors are to be mounted by the
customer external to the MCC.i Not available for 240 V units.j RWT is mounted at the motor. See
Section 35 for Reflected Wave Trap (RWT).Note: Output reactor or DV/DT filter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) — 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT filter is used at the motor.Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard out-put reactor.Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT filter.
Plug-in Options
Option Boards 2
I/O Expander 3
Encoder ExpanderInterbus S CommunicationsModbus CommunicationsPROFIBUS DP Communications
3
3
3
3
LonWorks CommunicationsCANopen (Slave) CommunicationsDeviceNet Communications
3
3
4
Johnson Controls N2 CommunicationsPROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector)Modbus (D9 Connector)
3
3
3
Plug-in Control Relays1 Relay2 Relays3 Relays
5
5
6
Other OptionsAutomatic Bypass CircuitBypass Drive Test Switch7 Relay 120 V Control with CPTIsolated Signal Processor3-15 PSIG Interface
7
7
5
3
3
Dynamic Breaking ResistorsGraphics Keypad
8
4
Line Fuses 35
RFI Filter 4
Deduct to Remove Output Filter i
KLC 2000 ft. (610 m) DV/DT Filter 6
Output Contactor 3
Dual Overloads 36
3 Contactor Bypass 36
RWT FilterNEMA 1NEMA 4X and Class 1, Division 2
j
j
30.2-24
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1294
SVX9000 30 – 200 hp at 480 V Non-Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive UnitsAll Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. Standard units of 9X unit space must be located in the bottom of the MCC and there is no vertical bus in the lower 48 inches (1219.2 mm). There is no vertical bus for 12X units.Note: Output reactor not included on 200 – 240 V units. Standard on 380 – 690 V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute.VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute.
Table 30.2-29. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Drives with Fusible disconnects require drive with option space.2 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide, 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.3 32-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.4 40-inch wide (1016.0 mm), 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.
CT Amperes
Nominal hp or CT(kW)
VT Amperes
Nominal hp or VT(kW)
CB Type1
Standard Unit Space
Drive OptionSpace
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim. (X)
200 – 240 Volts— 70 83113
— 25 30 40
70 83113139
25 30 40 50
100100100150
125175200150
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)72 (1828.8)
9X 9X 9X12X
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8) 3
12X12X12X12X
139165200
50 60 75
165200264
60 75100
———
———
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8) 2
12X12X12X
72 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 4
12X12X12X
380 – 500 Volts, 50/60 Hz— 52 65 77
— 40 50 60
52 65 77 96
40 50 60 75
100100100150
125150175225
54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)54 (1371.6)
9X 9X 9X 9X
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
12X12X12X12X
96125160180
75100125150
125160180—
100125150—
150250400—
300400500—
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8) 2
12X12X12X12X
72 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 4
12X12X12X12X
—260
—200
250320
200250
400400
600700
72 (1828.8) 272 (1828.8) 2
12X12X
72 (1828.8) 472 (1828.8) 4
12X12X
Table 30.2-30. Non-Plug-in Options
5 Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 31 for detailed information.
6 This option will fit in all units.7 All options will fit in option unit.8 Use with bypass option.i DB resistors are to be mounted by the
customer external to the MCC.j Not available for 240 V units.k RWT is mounted at the motor.Note: Output reactor or DV/DT filter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) — 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT filter is used at the motor.Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard out-put reactor.Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT filter.Note: Fusible units take option unit space. Not all options will fit in fusible units.
Non Plug-in Options
Option Boards 5
I/O Expander 6
Encoder ExpanderInterbus S CommunicationsModbus-RTU CommunicationsPROFIBUS Communications
6
6
6
6
LonWorks CommunicationsCANopen (Slave) CommunicationsDeviceNet Communications
6
6
6
Johnson ControlsT N2 CommunicationsPROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector)Modbus (D9 Connector)
7
7
7
Plug-in Control Relays1 Relay2 Relays3 Relays
6
6
6
Other OptionsAutomatic Bypass Circuit Bypass Drive Test Switch7 Relay 120 V Control with CPTIsolated Signal Processor3-15 PSIG Interface
8
8
6
7
7
Dynamic Breaking ResistorsGraphics Keypad
i
6
Line Fuses 7
RFI Filter 7
Deduct to Remove Output Filter j
KLC 1000 ft. (305 m) DV/DT Filter 6
Output Contactor 7
Dual Overloads 7
3 Contactor Bypass 7
Dynamic Breaking Circuit 6
RWT FilterNEMA 1NEMA 4X and Class 1, Division 2
k
k
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-25June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1295
SVX9000 200 – 1100 hp at 480 V Multi-Structure Adjustable Frequency Drive UnitsAll Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, and a door-mounted keypad. Disconnect and drive unit are in separate structures, structures are mechanically interlocked. Structures have no vertical bus. These drives are bottom exit only.CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute.VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute.
Table 30.2-31. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Drives with fusible disconnects require drive with option space.2 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is
in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.3 80-inch (2032.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is
in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure.4 68-inch (1727.2 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 48-inch (1219.2 mm) wide structure and disconnect is
in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.5 Contact factory for sizing.6 100-inch (2540.0 mm) wide unit. 80-inch (2032.0 mm) drive is in (2) 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide
structures, disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.7 116-inch (2946.4 mm) wide unit. 96-inch (2438.4 mm) drive is in (2) 48-inch (1219.2 mm) wide
structures, disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
CTAmperes
Nominal hp or CT(kW)
VTAmperes
Nominalhp or VT(kW)
CB Type1
StandardUnit Space
DriveOption Space
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim. (X)
380 – 550 Volts 320 400 480 600
250 300 400 500
400 460 600 672
300 400 500 600
400 600 6001200
800 80012001600
72 (1828.8) 272 (1828.8) 272 (1828.8) 472 (1828.8) 4
12X12X12X12X
72 (1828.8) 372 (1828.8) 35
5
12X12X12X12X
700 88010201070
600 700 800 900
880102010701200
700 800 9001000
1200120012001600
1600200020002000
72 (1828.8) 672 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 7
12X12X12X12X
5
———
12X———
12001300
10001100
——
——
16001600
25002500
72 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 7
12X12X
——
——
Table 30.2-32. Multi-Structure Options
8 Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 31 for detailed information.
9 This option will fit in all units.j All options will fit in Option unit.k Use with bypass option.l DB resistors are to be mounted by the
customer external to the MCC.m DV/DT filter not available 700 hp and above.n Consult factory for sizing and availability.o RWT is mounted at the motor. See
Section 35 for Reflected Wave Trap (RWT).Note: Output reactor or DV/DT filter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) — 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT filter is used at the motor.Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard out-put reactor.Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT filter.Note: Fusible units take option unit space. Not all options will fit in fusible units.
Plug-in Options
Option Boards 8
I/O Expander 9
Encoder ExpanderInterbus S CommunicationsModbus CommunicationsPROFIBUST DP Communications
9
9
9
9
LonWorks CommunicationsCANopen (Slave) CommunicationsDeviceNet Communications
9
9
9
Johnson ControlsT N2 CommunicationsPROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector)Modbus (D9 Connector)
j
j
j
Plug-in Control Relays1 Relay2 Relays3 Relays
9
9
9
Other OptionsAutomatic Bypass CircuitBypass Drive Test Switch7 Relay 120 V Control with CPTIsolated Signal Processor3-15 PSIG Interface
k
k
k
j
j
Dynamic Breaking ResistorsGraphics Keypad
l
9
Line Fuses 9j
RFI Filter j
Deduct to Remove Output Filter i
KLC 2000 ft. (610 m) DV/DT Filter jm
Output Contactor jn
3 Contactor Bypass jn
Dynamic Breaking Circuit i
RWT FilterNEMA 1NEMA 4X and Class 1, Division 2
o
o
30.2-26
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1296
Option Groups for ac Combination Starters, ac Drives
Option Group ATable 30.2-33. Wiring Class
1 Control Terminal Blocks and Device Panels not included with NEMA 1A wiring.
Table 30.2-34. 100 kA Circuit Breaker Starter Interrupting Capacity
2 Current Limiter Attachments are used. Add 6 inches (152.4 mm) to all size 3 and 4 starters.
Table 30.2-35. Control Circuit Transformers — Typical Sizing 3
3 Refer to Table 30.2-78 for actual ratings.Note: Price includes 1 secondary and 2 primary fuses.
Table 30.2-36. Control Circuit Fusing
Note: Required in accordance with NEC for all starter units with control wiring external to the MCC. See NEC, General for exceptions.
Table 30.2-37. Motor Starter Auxiliary Contacts
4 Maximum of 4 per contactor on multi-contactor starters and 6-inch (152.4 mm) units.
Table 30.2-38. Interlock for Switch or Breaker Operator
Note: For use when control circuit is fed from an external source.
Table 30.2-39. Internal Circuit Breaker Options
Table 30.2-40. Terminal Blocks
Table 30.2-41. Control Wire Options
5 Freedom Starter control terminals only available with spade wire terminals.
Table 30.2-42. Miscellaneous Options
6 May add 6 inches (152.4 mm) to unit size. Consult factory.7 May add 6 inches (152.4 mm). Consult factory.
Table 30.2-43. Vacuum Contactors in Lieu of Air Break
Table 30.2-44. Ground Fault Protection — Instantaneous or Adjustable
Description
NEMA Class IA 1NEMA Class IC
NEMA Class IIBNEMA Class IICNEMA Class IS (Includes 1B wiring and 2B schematics)
Starter Type Voltage
Starters with HMCPsStarters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
480 480
Starters with HMCPs Starters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
600 2600 2
Starter Size
1, 2 (100 VA) — Includes extra 50 VA3, 4 (150 VA) — Includes extra 50 VA5, 6 (250 VA) — Includes extra 50 VA
Extra 50 VA, Size 1, 2Extra 100 VA, Size 3, 4Extra 150 VA, Size 5, 6
Description
Control Fuse and Auxiliary SwitchControl FuseBlown Fuse Indicator
Description
1NO or 1NC (Sizes 1 – 4)1NO or 1NC (Sizes 5 – 6)
Maximum of eight on each contactor 4Maximum of four on each contactor
Description
1NO – 1NC2NO – 2NC
Description
Alarm Contact Auxiliary 1NO – 1NCAuxiliary 2NO – 2NC
120 Volts Shunt Trip 50ºC (Thermal Magnetic)
Description
Side Mounted
Description
#16 AWG (standard)#14 AWGWire Markers
Spade Wire TerminalsRing Wire Terminals 5Wiring to Common CPT
SIS Power Wire – SubstitutionSIS Control Wire – SubstitutionStarter Class 2 Interwiring/Per Wire
Description
Mini Ammeter and CT 6Mini VoltmeterMini Elapsed Time Meter
Panel Elapsed Time Meter 7Operations CounterWiring Diagram on DoorCoil Surge Suppressor
CT for Remote Metering (Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space)Device LabelsBlank Device Panels
Starter Type
FVNRFVR, 2S2W, PWRVAT, 2S1W, YD-OpenYD-Closed
Available Sizes 4 – 6
Description
Earth Leakage Breakers Sizes 1 – 4Earth Leakage Breakers Size 5D64 Relay, with Zero Sequence CT
All require additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-27June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1297
Table 30.2-45. Power Fuses — R, J Type
Table 30.2-46. Power Factor Capacitor Options
Table 30.2-47. Current Limiter Attachment for HMCP
Option Group BDevices may require extra unit space.
Table 30.2-48. Timing Relays
Table 30.2-49. Control Relays
1 The 6- and 8-pole units can be provided with 4 additional non-convertible NO contacts.
Table 30.2-50. Alternators
Option Group CDevices may require extra unit space.
Table 30.2-51. Monitoring Relays
2 Loop powered devices — requires 24 Vdc power source which is typically provided in the PLC.
3 Does not require separate 24 Vdc power source. Suitable for powering analog meters.
Ampere Rating
30 60100
OptionalOptionalOptional
200400600
OptionalOptionalOptional
Description
Blown Power Fuse Indicator (Set of 3-1 Per Phase)
Description
Size 1-2Size 3Size 4
—Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) spaceRequires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space
Type of Relay Mounting
Solid-State TimerPneumatic — AGASTAT
PanelPanel On or Off Delay
24 Hour Motor Timer7 Day TimerRepeat Cycle Timer
PanelPanelDoor or Panel
Number of Poles Type
2-Pole 4-Pole
General Purpose Type D7 Socket RelayN300 Fixed Contacts
2-Pole 4-Pole 6-Pole 8-Pole10-Pole
Type AR Machine Tool RelaysN600 Convertible Contacts
2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 6-Pole 1
8-Pole 1
Type M — D26 RelaysN600 Convertible Contacts
Description
2-Circuit Alternator3-Circuit Alternator
Panel (Additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space required on size 1s and size 2s)
Type of Relay
D60LA Current Sensing Voltage Transducer
—Price Includes 1 PT
Additional6-inch (152.4 mm)space requiredac Current
Sensors with CTs 2
0 – 5 Thru 0 – 100 A0 – 50 Thru 0 – 300 A0 – 300 Thru 0 – 600 A
ac Current Transducer, 4 – 20 mA, Self-powered with CTs 3
All Ratings
Phase Monitoring Relay — 3-Phase Watt Transducer, 4 – 20 mA, Self-powered CTs 3
30.2-28
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1298
Option Group E
Table 30.2-52. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
1 Maximum 2 devices per starter in dual units.2 Maximum of 6 devices without increasing compartment space.
Option Group F
Options for 6-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Units■ Control terminal blocks are 300 volt rated and are limited
to 12 points maximum.■ Standard VA control transformer only.
Table 30.2-53. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
3 On 6-inch (152.4 mm) starter units, pilot devices are limited to (3) E22 devices.
Device Device Type
Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit
10250T 12
Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder
Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb
Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit
E30 12
Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder
Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb
Device Device Type
Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit
E22 3
Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder
Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-29June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1299
Table 30.2-54. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers — Molded Case Circuit Breakers — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Frames reflect standard circuit breakers. Unit spacings shown include sufficient space to terminate cables on any standard breaker lug. If cable sizes exceed those listed, add 12-inch (304.8 mm) space for lug adapters.
1 See circuit breaker terminal data for variations.2 100% Rated when 90° cable is applied at 75°C ampacity for 100% rating.
Digitrip 310 LS is required and included in the price.3 Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) for top entry of incoming cables.4 Install at top or cable top entry or at bottom for bottom cable entry.5 NEMA 1 gasketed only.6 Digitrip 310 LS is standard and included in the pricing.7 The main breaker requires the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.8 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide.
FrameSize(Amperes)
CircuitBreakerFrame
InterruptingCapacity (kAIC)
MainUnit Size
FeederUnit Size
MaximumCableSize 1240 V 480 V 575 V Inches
(mm)XSpace
Inches(mm)
XSpace
125 E125H 100 65 25 12 (304.8) 2X 6 (152.4) 2X 4/0(1 per Phase)
150 FDC 100 100 35 18 (457.2) 3X 12 (304.8) 3X 4/0(1 per Phase)
225 J250FDC
100100
100100
3535
18 (457.2) 3X 18 (457.2) 3X 4/0(1 per Phase)
250 J250JDC
100100
65100
3535
24 (609.6)30 (762.0)
4X 5X
18 (457.2) 3X 350 kcmil(1 per Phase)
400 HKDKDC
100100
65100
2550
30 (762.0) 5X 24 (609.6) 4X 250 kcmil(2 per Phase)or 500 kcmil(1 per Phase)
CHKD 2CKDC 2
100100
65100
2550
30 (762.0) 5X
600 HLDLDC
100100
65100
3550
24 (609.6)34
4X 30 (762.0)4
5X 500 kcmil(2 per Phase)
CHLD 25
CLDC 25100100
65100
3550
24 (609.6)4
4X
800 NDC 100 100 50 42 (1066.8)4
7X 42 (1066.8)4
7X 750 kcmil(3 per Phase)
CHND 2CNDC 2
100100
65100
3550
72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X
1200 HND 6NDC 6
100100
65100
3550
42 (1066.8)4
7X 42 (1066.8)4
7X 750 kcmil(3 per Phase)
CHND 25
CNDC 25100100
65100
3550
72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X
2000 RD 6RDC 6CRD 2CRDC 2
100100100100
65100 65100
50655065
72 (1828.8)7
12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 750 kcmil(6 per Phase)
2500 RDRDC
100100
65100
5065
72 (1828.8)78
12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 750 kcmil(6 per Phase)
Table 30.2-55. Main-Tie-Main Auto-Throw Over Options
9 Panelmate page layouts are pre-defined, and not subject to customer modifications.
Option Description
AT200 Standard PLC-based control scheme. No operator interface (PanelMate) provided. Sequence of operations and external controls are pre-defined and not subject to customer modifications. Type of voltage sensing device must be chosen. If closed-transition opera-tion is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
AT300 Same as AT200, except includes operator interface (PanelMate). 9
AT300X Same as AT200, except customer modifications are acceptable. This is the proper choice for PLC-based systems with special sequences, more than main-tie-main configura-tions, and/or where special Panel-Mate page layouts are required.
AT300IQ Standard IQ Transfer-based control scheme for main-main configura-tions. Either or both sources may be generators. Includes manual-auto operation, and generator control switch. If closed-transition opera-tion is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
30.2-30
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1300
Table 30.2-56. Main Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Air Circuit BreakersManually or Electrically Operated — Fixed Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: A 4-inch (101.6 mm) filler section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
Table 30.2-57. Main Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated — Drawout Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 A 4-inch (101.6 mm) filler section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCCto allow for door opening.
2 Structure is rear aligned.
Table 30.2-58. Digitrip Units
3 Tie breaker adds an additional 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide bus transition section. Also (2) 4-inch (101.6 mm) filler sections will be added to the MCC if the tie breaker is located in the center of the MCC lineup. If the tie breaker is located between the two main structures the (2) 4-inch (101.6 mm)fillers are not needed.
FrameSizeAmperes
CircuitBreakerType
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) UnitSize
EnclosureWidth
EnclosureDepth240 V 480 V 575 V
800 MDS-608MDS-C08
65100
65100
65100
72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4)
1600 MDS-616MDS-C16
65100
65100
65100
2000 MDS-620MDS-C20
65100
65100
65100
3200 MDS-632MDS-C32
65100
65100
65100
42 (1066.8)
FrameSize(Amperes)
CircuitBreakerType
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Unit Size
EnclosureWidth
EnclosureDepth240 V 480 V 575 V
800 MDS-608MDS-C08
65100
65100
65100
72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6) 1 42 (1066.8) 2
1600 MDS-616MDS-C16
65100
65100
65100
2000 MDS-620MDS-C20
65100
65100
65100
3200 MDS-632MDS-C32
65100
65100
65100
Type Unit SpaceInches (mm)
RMS 310 – 1150 Refer to Section 2 for more details. —
OptionsTie Breaker 3Electrically Operated
72 (1828.8) or 12X—
AccessoriesUV Release-InstantaneousShunt Trip (standard on electrically operated breakers)Key Interlock on breaker
———
Auxiliary Switch (3A/3B)Cell Position SwitchOperations Counter
———
Auxiliary Power Module (to test Digitrip)Portable Lift TruckManual Close Pushbutton Cover
———
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-31June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1301
Table 30.2-59. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches —Dimensions in Inches (mm)3-Pole — 250 or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
1 Suitable for 100,000 ampere interrupting if Class RK fuses are used.2 Type of SW K-SW 30 – 800 amperes.3 For bottom cable entry, add 6 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.4 For bottom entry, add 12 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space.5 For top entry, add 6 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.6 High magnetic molded case switch.
Table 30.2-60. Lighting Panelboards 120/240 V or 120/208 V Lighting Panelboards Type — PL1AFixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire; 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire.
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Bolt-on 1-, 2-, 3-pole breakers only.
Table 30.2-61. 277/480 V or 480/600 V Lighting Panelboards Type — PRL3AFixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 480 or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire or 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire. Mounted in bottom portion of structure.
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Either plug-in or bolt-on 1-, 2-, 3-pole breakers only.
Table 30.2-62. Lighting Panelboard Circuit BreakersEaton’s Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers can be either plug-in or bolt-on, 1-, 2- or 3-pole through 240 V. 600 V maximum 1-, 2- or 3-pole circuit breakers are bolt-on.
Table 30.2-63. Automatic Transfer Switches — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7 ATVI designs include IQ Transfer door mounted microprocessor-based monitoring device for use in open transition transfer switches where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situations is essential. The IQ Transfer is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be used with Cutler-Hammer transfer switches. This device provides the opera-tor with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the power source currently in use. The IQ Transfer continuously monitors either single-phase or 3-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the Load. Depending on the application, the user can customize the IQ Transfer to meet specific application need.
8 Manually operated switch: MTVX = Single handle manual operation.NTVS = Electrically operated non-automatic.
9 Requires 42-inch (1066.8 mm) deep structure.
Switch Rating 1
Amperes 2
Fuse Clip SizeAmperes
Unit Space
Incoming Line Feeder
Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual
30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)——
3X 3X——
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X 2X 2X 2X
60/60 Dual 100 200 400
60/60 Dual 100 200 400
—18 (457.2)30 (762.0)48 (1219.2)
— 3X 5X 8X
12 (304.8)18 (457.2)30 (762.0)42 (1066.8)
2X 3X 5X 7X
600 8001200 6
600 8001200
54 (1371.8) 348 (1219.2) 460 (1524.0)
9X 3
8X 4
10X
48 (1219.2)48 (1219.2) 560 (1524.0)
8X 8X 5
10X
Numberof Circuits
Chassis Rating (Amperes)
Unit SpaceInches (mm)
1-Phase3-Wire
3-Phase4-Wire
1-Phase3-Wire
3-Phase4-Wire
183042
225225225
100100225
24 (609.6) or 4X30 (762.0) or 5X36 (914.4) or 6X
24 (609.6) or 4X30 (762.0) or 5X36 (914.4) or 6X
Numberof Circuits
ChassisRating(Amperes)
Unit Space Inches (mm)
3-Phase3-Wire
3-Phase4-Wire
141824
100250100
—36 (914.4) or 6X36 (914.4) or 6X
36 (914.4) or 6X——
263236
250100250
——48 (1219.2) or 8X
48 (1219.2) or 8X48 (1219.2) or 8X—
424212
100250400/600
48 (1219.2) or 8X60 (1524.0) or 10X36 (914.4) or 6X
60 (1524.0) or 10X60 (1524.0) or 10X—
143042
400/600400/600400/600
—48 (1219.2) or 8X60 (1524.0) or 10X
48 (1219.2) or 8X60 (1524.0) or 10X72 (1828.8) or 12X
Poles MaximumVoltage
Plug-in Bolt-on AmpereInterruptingCapacity
1/2/31/2/31/2/31/2/3
240240600600
HQPQPHW——
BABQBHWEHDHFD
10,00022,00014,00065,000
AmpereRating
Switch 7
Type InterruptingRating (kA)
UnitWidth
UnitSpace
100 8 150 8
Cutler-Hammer MTVX, NTVSCutler-Hammer MTVX, NTVS
65 65
20 (508.0)7
36 (914.4) or 6X
100 150
Cutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVI
65 65
48 (1219.2) or 8X
225 300 400
Cutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVI
65 65 65
72 (1828.8) or 12X
600 8001000
Cutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVICutler-Hammer ATVI
50 50 50
24 (609.6)7
72 (1828.8) or 12X
1000120016002000
Cutler-Hammer ATVISPCutler-Hammer ATVISPCutler-Hammer ATVISPCutler-Hammer ATVISP
100100100100
44 (1117.6)9
72 (1828.8) or 12X
100 150
ASCO Type 7000ASCO Type 7000
65 65
20 (508.0)9
72 (1828.8) or 12X
260 400
ASCO Type 7000ASCO Type 7000
65 35
28 (711.2)9
600 800
ASCO Type 7000ASCO Type 7000
35 50
36 (914.4)9
10001200
ASCO Type 7000ASCO Type 7000
50100
40 (1016.0)9
30.2-32
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1302
Table 30.2-64. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers■ Transformer 1.0 – 2.0 kVA will include a circuit breaker and
fuses in a standard 2X unit.■ Transformers 3.0 kVA and above have taps and
electrostatic shields as standard.■ Transformers 3.0 kVA and above will include the
primary and secondary circuit breakers housed behind a single door.
1 Transformers feeding an MCC mounted panelboard require a second-ary breaker or main breaker in panelboard.
Table 30.2-65. Power Factor Correction CapacitorsPF capacitors are electrolytic type and are optionally available with external line fuses and blown fuse indicators. Capacitors’ sizes must be specified by the customer.
Caution: Capacitors on the main bus of the MCC may affect solid-state equipment. Please consult factory.
Table 30.2-66. Current Limiting Reactors — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Structures contain three single-phase 60 Hz reactors which limit available short circuit current from 100,000 rms amperes to 14,000 rms amperes. Reactors available with ohmic values of .01, .015, .02 and .025.
Table 30.2-67. TVSS (Clipper Power System) with Circuit Breaker DisconnectIncludes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C contact, alarm enable and disable, and circuit breaker disconnect.
2 Also available in 12-inch (304.8 mm) unit (2X) without circuit breaker disconnect.
Note: Specify 3-phase Delta or 3-phase Wye.
Table 30.2-68. DeviceNet CommunicationsDeviceNet-enabled components in MCCs eliminate up to 90% of the control wiring versus traditional hardwired designs. 24 Vdc DeviceNet is prewired throughout the MCC. Trunk cable is provided in the horizontal wireway. Drop cable is provided for vertical wireways and units.
3 IT. starters up to 66 amperes require additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) when selecting DN50, DN65 DeviceNet interfaces.
kVARating
UnitSpace
Primary Breaker(included in space factor)
Secondary Breaker 1
(included in space factor) 230 V 480 V
Single-Phase .5 .75 1
2X2X2X
15 15 15
15 15 15
———
1.5 2 3
2X2X4X
15 15 15
15 15 15
—— 20
5 7.510
4X4X4X
15 20 25
15 20 30
30 40 60
152025
5X5X5X
40 50 60
40 60 70
90125150
3045
6X7X
70100
80125
175250
Three-Phase 91525
5X5X6X
15 20 40
15 25 40
40 60 90
3045
6X6X
40 60
50 70
125175
kvar Rating
208 V Unit Space 240 V Unit Space 600 V Unit Space
Inches (mm)
X Space Inches (mm)
X Space Inches (mm)
X Space
2 3 4
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
5 7.5 10
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
15 20 22.5
12 (304.8)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
2X4X4X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
25 30 40
———
———
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)—
4X4X—
12 (304.8)12 (304.8)12 (304.8)
2X2X2X
50 60 75
———
———
———
———
24 (609.6)24 (609.6)24 (609.6)
4X4X4X
90100120
———
———
———
———
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)36 (914.4)
4X6X6X
Amperes Unit Space Mounting
Inches(mm)
X Space
600 80010001200
72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)72 (1828.8)
12X12X12X12X
21 D x 20 W (533.4 D x 508.0 W)21 D x 20 W (533.4 D x 508.0 W)26 D x 28 W (660.4 D x 711.2 W)26 D x 28 W (660.4 D x 711.2 W)
Description Unit Space 2
Inches(mm)
X Space
Surge Current Per Phase100 kA CPS-100120 kA CPS-120 (Recommended Branch Unit)160 kA CPS-160200 kA CPS-200
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X3X
250 kA CPS-250 (Recommended Service Entrance)300 kA CPS-300400 kA CPS-400500 kA CPS-500
18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)18 (457.2)
3X3X3X3X
Part Number Description Space Requirements
D77D-DNA QCPort Interface to DeviceNet In Power Supply Buckets
D77D-EMAD77D-EMA
Modbus TCP CommunicationsModbus RTU485
In Power Supply Buckets
MVXDN MVX Adjustable FrequencyDrives DeviceNet Interface
—
OPTC7 SVX9000 Adjustable FrequencyDrives DeviceNet Interface
—
DN50, DN65 Discrete DeviceNet Interfacefor IT. Solid-State Starters
3
PS1 Single 5 ampere Power Supply 2X
PS2 Dual 5 ampere Power Supply 2X
PanelMate 1700
Operator interface for DeviceNet System
12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X
DN50 DeviceNet I/O module 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X Minimum
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-33June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1303
Earth Leakage BreakersEarth Leakage Breakers offer Class 1 ground fault protection down to the 30 mA level.
■ Ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from .03 to 30 amperes in eight steps.
■ Ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds in six steps.
Standard Features■ Built-in push-to-trip for functional testing.■ Tripped window indicates red for ground fault trip.■ Alarm contact for remote indication of trip.
Table 30.2-69. Earth Leakage Breakers
1 Six-inch (152.4 mm) not required for NEMA size 6 starters.
Table 30.2-70. Electronic Metering Specifications 23
2 Requires 12-inch (2X) unit space.3 For Power Xpert meter, contact Eaton.4 At computer only.5 Up to 24 data values may be used for Trend Analysis with Time,
Date Stamp.6 Communications to Modbus, Ethernet available via optional
Communication Modules.
Table 30.2-71. Incoming Line Metering and Bus Protection
7 Two electronic meters will fit in a single 12-inch (304.8 mm) (2X) unit.8 3-phase/3-wire systems require 2 CTs. 3-phase/4-wire systems require
3 CTs.9 Ammeters require 2 CTs for 3-phase/3-wire systems, and 3 CTs for
3-phase/4-wire systems. Voltmeters require 2 PTs for 3-phase/3-wire systems, and 3-PTs for 3-phase/4-wire systems.
j Without disconnect 12 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X.
Harmonic Correction
Table 30.2-72. Clean Control CenterEaton’s Cutler-Hammer Clean Control Center is an integrated power correction system that provides harmonic correction directly on the MCC Horizontal Bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and dynamically injects into the Horizontal Bus a synthesized waveform which cancels harmonic content from non-linear loads such as ac drives. The result is a clean waveform. Clean Control Centers are UL 845 listed.
k Clean Control Center model includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCE structure, current transformers and door-mounted digital interface panel.
l Multiple units can be applied in parallel for additional harmonic correction.
Frame HMCP or Thermal-Magnetic
Additional SpaceRequired
FJK
YesYesYes
1X 11X 11X 1
Description IQ 320 IQ DP-4130 IQ Analyzer 6400 and 6600
Volts L-L, L-N L-L, L-N L-L, L-N
Current A, B, C A, B, C A, B, C, N, G
Power Watt, var, VA Watt, var, VA Watt, var, VA
Power Factor Apparent, Displacement
Apparent, Displacement
Apparent, Displacement
Frequency Hertz Hertz Hertz
THD — Amperes, Volts Amperes, Volts
Demand Values All All All
Trend Analysis 4 — Time, Date 5
ProgrammableOutput Relays
— (3) 10 AForm C
(4) 10 A Form C
ProgrammableAnalog Outputs
— — (3) 0-10/4-20 mA
Contact Inputs — (1) kWDemand
(3) + 30 Vdc Differential
Analog Inputs — — (1) 0-20/4-20 mA
Display Type Reverse ModeLCD with LEDBacklight
7 SegmentLED
Graphic LCDwith LED Backlight
Communications 6
Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Type Description Unit SpaceInches (mm) 7
SwitchboardMeters 9
1% Accuracy
AmmeterAmmeter with SwitchVoltmeterVoltmeter with Switch
12 (304.8)or 2X
AM/VMAM/VM with Switches
InstrumentTransformers
600/800 A CT1000 A CT2000 A CT2500 A CT
Consult Eaton
480/120 PT 6 (152.4)or 1X
SignalTransducers
Current (Add CT) 1-PhaseVoltage (Add PT)Watt (Add CT and PT) 1-Phase
6 (152.4)or 1X
Voltage ProtectionTVSS (See Table 30.2-67)Ground Detection Lights — 3-Phase Underground SystemsSystem Voltage Monitor Lightning Arrester and Surge Capacitor
18 (457.2)or 3X j
6 (152.4)or 1X
Ground Fault Sensing C-HRG “Safe Ground” High Resistance Ground SystemCurrent Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep,
20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structurewithout a vertical wireway.
72 (1828.8)or 12XVoltage
HarmonicCurrent (Amperes)
Input Voltage
DisconnectType
StandardUnit Space k
Inches (mm)
StandardUnitSpace (X)
50 A ActiveHarmonic Filter l
Up to480 V
MoldedCase Switch
72 H x 20 W(1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
12X
100 A ActiveHarmonic Filter l
Up to480 V
MoldedCase Switch
72 H x 20 W(1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
12X
30.2-34
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1304
Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic Control — Typical Layout
Figure 30.2-4. Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic Control — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Note: As seen by the upstream electrical system — compliance to the most stringent standards of IEEE 519 is assured.
The layout above is a typical arrangement for Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Clean Control Center including harmonic correction units for non-linear loads such as ac Variable Frequency Drives. The horizontal bus of the Clean Control Center is virtually free of harmonic current content at the point where the Harmonic Correction Unit connects to the bus. From this point to the connection at the utility bus, the Clean Control Center complies with the most stringent requirements of IEEE 519 and provides a clean
waveform to the upstream distribution system. Harmonic Correction may be applied to loads fed directly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted ac drives) or loads fed indirectly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted circuit breakers feeding remote drives). Multiple correction units may be used to achieve the level of harmonic correction as required by the amount of non-linear loads within the MCC lineup.
MainBreaker
Panelboard HarmonicCorrection
Unit100 A
SVX9000ac Drive(30 hp)
SVX9000ac Drive(150 hp)
SVX9000ac Drive(250 hp)
SVX9000ac Drive(30 hp)Starter
TVSSProtection
Module
Starter
Starter
20.00(508.0)
Load SideHarmonics Present
Source SideHarmonics Attenuated
DistributionTransformer
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
20.00(508.0)
28.00(711.2)
24.00(609.6)
24.00(609.6)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-35June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1305
Standard Structures and Structure OptionsEaton’s standard IT. Series MCC structure is NEMA 1 gasketed, 90-inch (2286.0 mm) high, 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide with a depth as shown in Figure 30.2-5. Each standard structure has a 9-inch (228.6 mm) high horizontal wireway at the top and at the bottom and a 4-inch (101.6 mm) wide full height vertical wireway at the right.
All wireway doors are hinged and secured with 1/4-turn latches. The standard busing is 600 A, UL rated, copper horizontal bus and 300 A, UL rated, copper vertical bus braced for 65,000 symmetrical amperes. Many other bus sizes and types are available. Also included as standard is a vertical bus isolation barrier.
Table 30.2-73. Standard Structures and Structure Options — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 30.2-74. Structure Modifications — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 The standard IT. structure is designed to comply with the UL 2-meter requirement. Disconnect operating handle is not more than 2 meters [78 inches (1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the MCC. Motor Control Centers elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. UL handle extension optionally available when required.
Description
Standard Structures16 (406.4) deep structure Structure 121 (533.4) deep structure
Front mounting only Structure 2Front and rear mounting Structure 3
4 (101.6) of additional structure width, 40 (1016.0) maximum 8 (203.2) vertical wireway in lieu of standard 4-inch (101.6) Structure 4
Special StructuresSingle corner section for “L” configuration of MCCTransition section
Series 2100 to Type W10 (254.0) wide — front aligned
Plug-in blank relay mounting space, per 6-inch Any 6 (152.4) heightFixed-mounted relay back pan, full depth of structure
20 (508.0) structure with wireway, 13 (330.2) with usable panel24 (609.6) structure with wireway, 17 (431.8) with usable panel28 (711.2) structure with wireway, 21 (533.4) with usable panel20 (508.0) structure without wireway, 17 (431.8) with usable panel24 (609.6) structure without wireway, 21 (533.4) with usable panel28 (711.2) structure without wireway, 25 (635.0) with usable panel32 (812.8) with double door36 (914.4) with double door40 (1016.0) with double door
Programmable controller mounting structure (per complete structure with full fixed mounting back pan)
20 (508.0) structure with wireway Complete section24 (609.6) structure with wireway Complete section28 (711.2) structure with wireway Complete section20 (508.0) structure without wireway Complete section24 (609.6) structure without wireway Complete section28 (711.2) structure without wireway Complete section
Plexiglass see-through door insert for PLC structure 6 (152.4) increments19 (482.6) instrumentation mounting racks installed in PLC structure Consult Eaton
Channel floor sills: 11-gauge, 1 x 3 (25.4 x 76.2)NEMA 1 gasketNEMA 12 dust-proof, includes bottom plateBottom plate for NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure150-watt space heater, per structureThermostat for space heater controlPullbox kit for cable and wiring to be field mounted on top structure
12 (304.8) high18 (457.2) high24 (609.6) high
Rear hinged structure door, 72 (1828.8) highNEMA 2 drip shield on top of MCCNEMA 3R non-walk-in
Front-mountedBack-to-back
NEMA 3R walk-in aisle-front mountedNEMA 3R walk-in tunnel typeNEMA 4X — consult factorySpecial reduced height structuresSeismic certification (earthquake qualification)UL handle extension 1
Figure 30.2-5. Structures — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
16 (406.4)
20(508.0)
90(22286.0)
21 (533.4)
Structure 2 ➀72-inch (1828.8 mm) SpaceFront Mounted Only
Structure 3 72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space — Front—66-inch (1676.4 mm) Space — Rear—Back-to-Back
Structure 1 ➀72-inch (1828.8 mm) SpaceFront Mounted Only
Top HorizontalWireway
VerticalVeVWireway
VerticalVeVCompartment
BottomHorizontalWireway
20(508.0)
21 (533.4)
20(508.0)
30.2-36
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1306
Table 30.2-75. Bus Modifications — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 30.2-76. Main Lugs Only — Mechanical Lug Compartment (3-Phase, 3- or 4-wire) — Dimensions in Inches (mm)Provisions for terminating incoming line cables directly onto the MCC bus system. Up to 1200 amperes, all lug landings are bolted to a fully rated vertical bus in that section. MLO sections must be put at the top for top entry cables and at the bottom for bottom entry cables. For smaller cable sizes, cable lugs may also be extended into an optional top hat as shown in this table.
6 6-inch (152.4 mm) = (1X) unit space.7 Lug landings require the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
Eaton’s IT. MCCs bear the UL label. Service entrance labeling is available.Description
Main Bus, Per Vertical Structure Cu — Tin-Plated (Standard)Copper Horizontal Bus Ratings Tin-Plated 50°C 65°C
600 Ampere Size 800 Ampere Size1200 Ampere Size1600 Ampere Size2000 Ampere Size2500 Ampere Size3200 Ampere Size
.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) – Bars/Phase 2
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 4
.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) – Bars/Phase 6
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 8N/A
.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 1
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 2
.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) – Bars/Phase 4
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 6
.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) – Bars/Phase 8
———21 (533.4) Deep 1
21 (533.4) Deep 1
21 (533.4) Deep 2
21 (533.4) Deep 23
Silver-Plated BusInsulated main horizontal bus, per vertical structure (taping)Vertical bus, per vertical structure: 300 A — copper (tin-plated)Increased bus capacity: Rated at 600 A (Front mounted only)
Rated at 600 A (Back-to-back) — copperRated at 800 A (Back-to-back and front)Rated at 1200 A
Increased mechanical bus bracing, per vertical structure:42,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current65,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current100,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current
Vertical Bus isolation barrier, per vertical structureLabyrinth design insulation-isolation vertical bus barrierGround bus, 300 A standard, per vertical structureIncreased capacity ground bus only, 600 A, 1/4- x 2-inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm), per vertical structurePlug-in Grounding System, includes 300 A vertical ground bus and unit grounding clips, per vertical structureNeutral bus, ungrounded for 3-phase, 4-wire power, per vertical structure 5Splice plates
OptionalOptionalStandard 4
Cu OnlyStandardCu OnlyCu Only
OptionalStandardOptionalStandardOptional FreedomStandard Cu Standard Cu Cu Cu —
1 Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.2 Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Not available in back-to-back structure.3 Contact Eaton for 3200 ampere dimensions.4 Vertical bus and unit stabs are tin-plated copper only.5 Neutral is half-rating of horizontal bus.
MaximumCable Size(kcmil)
BusRating(Amperes)
MaximumCablesper Phase
Cable Entry(Top orBottom)
LugType
UnitSpace
X Space 6
EnclosureWidth
350 600 2 — ScrewCrimp
12 (304.8)18 (457.2)
2X 3X
20 (508.0)
4 Top
Bottom
ScrewScrewCrimp
18 (457.2)24 (609.6)36 (914.4)
3X 4X 6X
18-inch (457.2 mm) Top Hat
Either — —
600 800 2 — ScrewCrimp
18 (457.2)24 (609.6)
3X 4X
4 — ScrewCrimp
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)
4X 6X
18-inch (457.2 mm)Top Hat
Either — —
750 1000 2
4
— ScrewCrimpScrewCrimp
24 (609.6)36 (914.4)36 (914.4) 748 (1219.2) 7
4X 6X12X12X
1000 1200 2 — ScrewCrimp
30 (762.0)36 (914.4)
5X 6X
1000 2500 8 — ScrewCrimp
72 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 7
12X12X
3200 — — ScrewCrimp
72 (1828.8) 772 (1828.8) 7
12X12X
Bus Duct Entry Sandwich Type to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect — Pull BoxPull box and pre-fabricated bus con-nectors are supplied to match the sandwich type bus duct end flange. Bus duct is assumed to enter the top. Bus duct type and orientation to the MCC must be provided.
Table 30.2-77. Bus Duct Entry to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect — Pull Box — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8 Contact Eaton for 3200 ampere dimensions.Note: Consult factory for non-segregated bus requirements.
Horizontal Bus Rating (Amperes)
Pull BoxHeight
600 – 16002000 – 2500 8
18 (457.2)24 (609.6)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-37June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1307
Table 30.2-78. Control Power Requirements Table 30.2-79. Typical Heat Loss Data
Table 30.2-80. Typical Weights in lbs. (kg)
1 Weight for NEMA 1 structure with 600 ampere horizontal, 300 ampere vertical and dc power bus.
NEMASize
ContinuousCurrent
InrushCurrent
FVNR, 252W, FVRSize 1Size 2Size 3Size 4Size 5Size 6Size 7
.28 .34 .37 .37 .67 .28 .28
3.8 6.1 7.0 7.0 7.8 3.3 3.3
2S1WSize 1Size 2Size 3Size 4Size 5
.54 .66 .70 .701.00
7.610.811.611.615.6
SSRV24 A33 – 304 A360 – 850 A
.28 .721.12
3.81010
Description Current (A) Loss (W)
VerticalSectionsHorizontal Bus and Ampacity
600 80012001600200025003200
200 300 500 700100014002050
Space Heaters (Each) 500
FVNR Size 1 30
FVNR Size 2 50
FVNR Size 3 90
FVNR Size 4 110
FVNR Size 5 210
16-Inch (406.4 mm) Deep x 20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Structure 121-Inch (533.4 mm) Deep x 20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Structure 1
205 (93)
265 (120)
Adder for Horizontal Bus
800 A1000 A1200 A1600 A2000 A2500 A3200 A
10 (5) 15 (7) 18 (8) 24 (11) 30 (14) 38 (17) 49 (22)
Adder for Vertical Bus
600 A800 A1200 A
30 (14) 40 (18) 60 (27)
Adder for Units IT. — Inches (mm)
6.00 (152.4)12.00 (304.8)18.00 (457.2)24.00 (609.6)30.00 (762.0)36.00 (914.4)
10 (5) 20 (9) 37 (17) 50 (23) 83 (38)102 (46)
30.2-38
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data
Sheet 1308
Motor ProtectionIn line with 2005 NEC 430.6(A), circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selec-tions are based on full load currents for induction motors running at speeds normal for belted motors and motors with normal torque char-acteristics using data taken from NEC Table 130.250 (3-phase). Actual motor nameplate ratings shall be used for selecting motor running overload pro-tection. Motors built special for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and appli-cations will require other consider-ations as defined in the application section of the NEC.
These additional considerations may require the use of a higher rated HMCP, or at least one with higher magnetic pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based on known characteristics of Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer type breakers, specific units are recommended. The current ratings are no more than the maxi-mum limits set by the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters. Motors with lower code letters will require further considerations.
In general, these selections were based on:
1. Ambient — Outside enclosure not more than 40°C (104°F).
2. Motor starting — Infrequent starting, stopping or reversing.
3. Motor accelerating time — 10 seconds or less.
4. Locked rotor — Maximum 6 times motor FLA.
Type HMCP motor circuit protector may not set at more than 1300% of the motor full-load current, to comply with NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA Design B high efficiency motors which can be set up to 1700%.)
Circuit breaker selections are based on types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types may be required to satisfy specific system application requirements.
For motor full load currents of 208 and 200 volts, increase the corresponding 230-volt motor values by 10 and 15% respectively.
Table 30.2-81. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection GuideHorsepower Full Load
Amperes(NEC) FLA
Fuse Size NEC 430.52MaximumAmperes
Recommended Cutler-Hammer
CircuitBreaker
Motor CircuitProtector Type HMCP
Time Delay Non-Time Delay Amperes Type Amperes Adj. Range
230 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3
3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6
10 10 15 20
15 20 25 30
15 15 15 20
E125E125E125E125
7 15 15 30
21 – 77 45 – 165 45 – 165 90 – 330
5 7-1/2 10 15
15.2 22 28 42
30 40 50 80
50 70 90 150
30 50 60 90
E125E125E125E125
30 50 50100
90 – 330 150 – 550 150 – 550 300 – 1100
20 25 30 40
54 68 80104
100 125 150 200
175 225 250 350
100125150150
E125E125E125J250
100150150150
300 – 1100 500 – 1500 500 – 1500 750 – 1500
50 60 75100
130154192248
250 300 350 450
400 500 600 800
200225300400
J250J250HKDHKD
150250400400
875 – 17501250 – 25002000 – 40002000 – 4000
125150200
312360480
600 7001000
100012001600
500600700
HLDHLDHND
600600600
1800 – 60001800 – 60001800 – 6000
460 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3
1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8
6 6 6 10
6 10 15 15
15 15 15 15
E125E125E125E125
3 7 7 15
9 – 33 21 – 77 21 – 77 45 – 165
5 7-1/2 10 15
7.6 11 14 21
15 20 25 40
25 35 45 70
15 25 35 45
E125E125E125E125
15 30 30 50
45 – 165 90 – 330 90 – 330 150 – 550
20 25 30 40
27 34 40 52
50 60 70 100
90 110 125 175
50 70 70100
E125E125E125E125
50 70100100
150 – 550 210 – 770 300 – 1100 300 – 1100
50 60 75100
65 77 96124
125 150 175 225
200 150 300 400
110250150175
E125J250J250J250
100250250250
500 – 1500 750 – 1500 875 – 1750 1000 –2000
125150200
156180240
300 350 450
500 600 800
225250350
HKDHKDL600
400400600
2000 – 40002000 – 40001800 – 6000
575 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3
1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9
3 6 6 10
6 10 10 15
15 15 15 15
HFDHFDHFDHFD
3 7 7 7
9 – 30 21 – 70 21 – 70 21 – 70
5 7-1/2 10 15
6.1 9 11 17
15 20 20 30
20 30 35 60
15 20 25 40
HFDHFDHFDHFD
15 30 30 30
45 – 150 90 – 300 90 – 300 90 – 300
20 25 30 40
22 27 32 41
40 50 60 80
70 90 100 125
50 60 60 80
HFDHFDHFDHFD
50 50 70100
150 – 500 150 – 500 210 – 500 300 – 1000
50 60 75100
52 62 77 99
100 110 150 175
175 200 250 300
100125150175
HFDHFDHFDHJD
100150150150
300 – 1000 750 – 2500 750 – 2500 750 – 2500
125150200
125144192
225 300 350
400 450 600
200225300
HJDHJDHKD
250250400
1250 – 25001250 – 25002000 – 4000
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-39June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesTechnical Data/Dimensions
Sheet 1309
Table 30.2-82. Starter Sizes Selection Guide
1 Information is based on Table 430-150 of NEC (1999).2 Information is based on use of copper conductors — Table 310-16 and Tables 1, 4 and 5, Ch. 9 of NEC. If aluminum conductors are used refer to
Table 310-16 of NEC (1999).
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 30.2-6. Side View A — Front Mounted Only3 Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only.
When location not specified, MTB supplied at the bottom.4 Standard structure arrangement in front
Without MTB; A & B = 9 (228.6)With MTB at bottom; A & B = 9 (228.6)With MTB at top; A = 15 (381.0), B = 3 (76.2)
Figure 30.2-7. Side View B — Front and Rear Mounted5 Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only.
When location not specified, MTB supplied at the bottom.6 Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure.7 Standard structure arrangement in front
Without MTB; A & B = 9 (228.6)With MTB at bottom; A & B = 9 (228.6)With MTB at top; A = 15 (381.0), B = 3 (76.2)
8 Standard structure arrangement in rearWithout MTB; C = 9 (228.6), D = 72 (1828.8), E = 3 (76.2)With MTB at bottom; C = 0, D = 66 (1676.4), E = 9 (228.6)With MTB at top; C = 12 (304.8), D = 60 (1524.0), E = 3 (76.2)
Squirrel-CageMotorHorsepower
230 V, 3-Phase 460 V, 3-Phase 575 V, 3-Phase
Control CenterStarter NEMASize
Full Load 1
CurrentAmperes
Wire Size 2
at 75°C Max.at 40°C Amb.
Control CenterStarter NEMASize
Full Load 1
CurrentAmperes
Wire Size 2
at 75°C Max.at 40°C Amb.
Control CenterStarter NEMASize
Full Load 1
CurrentAmperes
Wire Size 2
at 75°C Max.at 40°C Amb.
1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2
1111
2.2 3.2 4.2 6.0
14 14 14 14
1111
1.1 1.6 2.1 3.0
14 14 14 14
1111
.9 1.3 1.7 2.4
14 14 14 14
2 3 5 7-1/2
1111
6.8 9.6 15.2 22
14 14 12 10
1111
3.4 4.8 7.6 11
14 14 14 14
1111
2.7 3.9 6.1 9
14 14 14 14
10 15 20 25
2233
28 42 54 68
10 8 6 4
1222
14 21 27 34
14 10 10 8
1222
11 17 22 27
14 12 10 10
30 40 50 60
3445
80104130154
3 1 1/0 3/0
3334
40 52 65 77
8 6 4 3
3334
32 41 52 62
8 8 6 4
75100125150
5566
192248312360
4/0300 kcmil500 kcmil 2 – 4/0
4455
96124156180
2 1/0 3/0 4/0
4455
77 99125144
3 2 1/0 2/0
200250300
6——
480——
2 – 300 kcmil——
566
240302361
300 kcmil500 kcmil 2 – 4/0
566
192242289
4/0300 kcmil400 kcmil
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Horizontal Bus Location
Vertical Bus LocationLocation ofGround Bus
10.50(266.7)(266.7)
12 1212.12)(307.8)
3.12 (79.2)
4.62 (117.3)
4.62 (117.3)
RemovableBus Barrier
Flat Rear CoverSupplied on FrontMounted OnlyStructure
Minimum Rated VerticalVeVBus Supplied as Standardin Front Mounted OnlyStructure
➃
A2.25(57.2)
➂
➂
➃
Front Horizontal Wireway 7.16 (181.9) Deep
BFloor Line
25.4)1.00 (2
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills3 inch (76.2 mm) Channel SiledSupplied Only When Specifie9.73 (247.14)
or 14.11 (358.4)o20.11 (510.8)
)or 15.73 (399.5)
010.50(266.7)(266 7
LLocation of Neutral BusWhen SpecifiedWhen Specified
3.00(76.2)76.2)
5.00 (127.0)
Horizontal Bus Location
Vertical Bus Location
yRear Horizontal Wireway4.97 (126.2) Deep
Location ofGround Bus
Front HorizontalWireway
7.16 (181.9) Deep
A
erRemovable Bus Barrie
C
9.2)3.12 (79
17.3)4.62 (11
4.62 (117.3)4.62 (11
10.50(266.7)
2.25(57.2)
12 1212.12(307.8)
15.00(381.0)
➄
➄
➆
B
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel SillsSupplied Only When Specified
Location of Neutral BusLocation of Neutral BWhen SpecifiedWhen Specified
Floor Line
➄
➇
➅
CCCC
D
E
1.00 (25.4)
5.00 (127.0)5.00 (1
110.50(266.7)266 7
03.00(76.2)(76 2
20.11 (510.8)or 15.73 (399.5)or 15.73 (399.5)
9.73 (247.14)or 14.11 (358.4)
30.2-40
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesDimensions
Sheet 1310
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 30.2-8. Front Mounted Only (FMO) in Inches (mm) — 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 16 Inches (406.4 mm) Deep
Figure 30.2-9. Front Mounted Only (FMO) in Inches (mm) — 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
R blRemovableR blTop Cover
3.503 50(88.9)(
3.503 50(88.9)(
Top ConduitSpace
5.41(137.4)
16.00(406.4)
1.25(31.8)(31.8)
Vertical WirewayDoor
17 5017.50(444.5)
20.00(508.0)
Wire TieBrackets
7.31(185.7)
VVerticalWWireway4.81
(1122.2)Removable BottomFrame Members d
Bottom Conduit Space bc
13 9713.97(354.8)
.70(17.8)
16.00(406.4)
.53 Dia. a
2.00(50.8).53 Dia. a
5.41(137.4)
6.81(173.0)
e
17.50(444.5)
2.20(55.9)
1.25(31.8)
1 251.25((31.8)
1.25(31.8)
1.58(40.1)
RemovableTop Cover
3.50(88.9)
3.50(88.9)
Top ConduitSpace
5.41(137.4)
20.38(517.7)
1.25(31.8)
Vertical WirewayDoor17.50
(444.5)
20.00(508.0)
2.20(55.9)
1 251.25(31.8)(31.8)
16.00(406.4)(406.4)(406.4).53 Dia. a
5.41(137.4)
5.78(146.8)
e
f
17 5017.5017 50(444.50)444.50444.50
1.25(31.8)
1 251.251 25(31.8)(
5.41(137.4)
1.58(40.1)
Removable BottomFrame Members d
Bottom Conduit Space bc
.70.70.70)(17.88)
.53 Dia. . aaa
2.002 00((50.8)(
WWire W TieBracketsBracketsBrackets
7 317.317 31((185.7)(
VVerticalVWirewayWirewayWireway4.81
(122.2)
8.3518866.1)(466
1 Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 (50.8).36 (9.1) — 16 recommended.
2 Recommended maximum conduit height above floor line 3.5 (88.9).
3 Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.5 x 9.73 (444.5 x 247.1).
4 For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic.
5 This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available.
6 Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in FMO structure.
See Side View A Page 30.2-39 for vertical dimensions.
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-41June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesDimensions
Sheet 1311
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 30.2-10. Front and Rear Mounted in Inches (mm) — 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep
Figure 30.2-11. Transition Structure in Inches (mm) — 10 Inches (254.0 mm) Wide, 16 or 21 Inches (406.4 or 533.4 mm) Deep
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
RemovableTop Cover
3 503.50(88.9)
3.50(88.9)
Top ConduitSpace
5.41(137.4)
21.00(533.4)
1.25(31.8)(31 8)
Front Vertical Wireway DoorWireway Door
17 5017.50(444.5)
20.00(508.0)
2.20(55.9)
1.25(31.8)(31.8)
2.20(55.9)
3.22(81.79)
Removable BottomFrame Members d
Bottom Conduit Space bc
18.35(466.1)
1.32(33.5)
16.00(406.4)
.53 Dia. a
2.00(50.8).53 Dia. a
5.41(137.4)
e
17 5017.50(444.50)444.50)
1 251.25(31.8)
1 251.25(31.8)
5.41(137.4)
5.78(146.81)
WiWire TiTieBrackets
7.317.31)(185.7)
VVerticalWirewayWireway4.81
(122.2)122.2)
7 317.31)(185.7)
4.81(122.2)
RearVerticalWireway
RemovableTop Cover
Top ConduitSpace 20.38
(517.7)oor 16.00(406.4)
1.25(31.8)
10 0010.00(254.0)
2.20(55.9)
1.25(31.8)
5.41(137.4)
Removable BottomFrame Members d
Bottom ConduitSpace bc
.70(17.8)
.53 Dia.(2) a
5.41(137.4)
e
1.25(31.8)
1.25(31.8)
5.41(137.4)
5.78(146.81)
5.00(127.0)
Ground BusLocation
2.25(57.15)
HorizontalWireway
7.16 inches(181.9 mm) deep
12.12(307.9)
Horizontal BusLocation g
3.12(79.25)
4.62(117.35)
4.62(117.35)
Removable BusBarrier
Flat CoverSupplied onRear of FrontMounted OnlyStructure
Floor Line
Location of Neutral BusWhen Specified
1.00(25.4)
5.00(127.0)
10.50(266.7)
3.00(76.2)
9.73 (247.14)or 14.11 (358.4)
f
18.35 (466.1)or 13.97 (354.8)
20.11 (510.8)or 15.73 (399.5)
7.50(190.5)
1.58(40.1)
7.50(190.5)(190.5
1 Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 (50.8) .36 (9.1) — 16 recommended.
2 Recommended maximum conduit height above floor line 3.5 (88.9).
3 Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.5 x 14.11 (444.5 x 358.4) in 21-inch deep structure. 7.5 x 9.73 (190.5 x 247.1) in 16-inch deep structure.
4 For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic.
5 This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available.
6 Channel sills supplied only when specified. For seismic loads channel sills if required must be embedded so top of channel sill is still at floor level.
See Side View B Page 30.2-39 for vertical dimensions.
30.2-42
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesDimensions
Sheet 1312
Figure 30.2-12. IT. Control Center Outline and Floor Plan NEMA 3R 28.85-Inch (732.8 mm) Deep Structure — Dimensions in Inches (mm)1 Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 inches (50.8 mm). 38 (9.7 mm) — 16 recommended.2 Recommended maximum conduit height above floor line 3.5 inches (88.9 mm).3 Maximum conduit space with channel sills 15.78 x 16.6 inches (400.8 x 421.6 mm).4 Master terminal block assembly furnished for type “C” wiring only. When location not specified MTB supplied at the bottom.5 Recommended standard anchor bolting for Detail 1. When channel sills are used see Detail 2.6 This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available.7 Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure.8 Standard structure arrangement (In front) without master terminal block, A and B — 9 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom,
A and B — 9 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A — 15 inches (381.0 mm), B — 3 inches (76.2 mm).Note: Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure.Note: The 16-inch deep (interior) enclosures require only a 24.22-inch (615.2 mm) depth exterior enclosure.
Minimum Rated Vertical BusSupplied on FrontMounted Only Structures
TopConduitSpace
23.50 (596.9)16.00
(406.4)
17.50(444.5)(444.5)03.00
(76.2)(76 2
3.78 (96.0)8 (96.0
BottomConduitSpace➁➂
➅
Location of NeutralBus When Specified
Detail 1 ➄
4.00 (101.6)
2.25(57.2)
➅
FloorLine
A A01 02 03
➃
4.31 (109.5)20 (508.0)
15.69 (398.5)
Upper HorizontalWireway Door 2.25
(57.2)57.2
➇
➀
➀
➃
VerticalVeVWireway
25 7525.75(654.1)(654 1)
1 881.88(47.8)(47 8)
2.87 (72.9)
28.85(732.8)(732.8)
20.30(515.6)(515.6)
03.50(88.9)➆
VerticalVeVWireway
Wire TieBrackets
(108.0)4.25
4.81 (122.2) (44.5)1.75
SECTION A-A
4.62 (117.3)
.75(19.1)
Detail 2 ➄
24.85(631 2)(631.2)(631 2)
2.12(53.8)
5.00(127.0)
B
LowerHorizontalWirewayDoor
nVertical Bus LocatioVeV n
7.97 (204.2)
.18(4.6)4 6 .18 (4.6)
28 85 (732 8)28.85 (732.8)9.80(248.9)
4.82(122.4)
23 5023.50(599.4)(599 4)
(185.7)7.31
94.62(2403.3)2403.3)
5.78 (146.8)78 (14
24 85 (631 2)24.85 (631.2)
9 55.25(2419.4)2419.4
A
CLCLC
4.25 (108.0)
1.25 (31.8)Max.
3.50(88.9)
Channel Sills4 x 1.56 (101.6 x 39.6)
.75(19.1)
24.85(631.2)
23 3523.35(593.1)(593 1)(593.1)
90.00(2286.0)2286.0
2.38(60.5)
2.252.25(57.2)(57.2
1.755 (44.5)(44.5 11.75(44.5)
04.00(101.66)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)127.0)
33.00(76.2) 3.753.75
(95.3)(95 33 753.75
(95.3)95 3
24.85(631.2) 23.35
(593.1)
.75 (19.1)
.75 (19.1)
15.78(400.8)
1.56(39.6)
14.044 041.88 (447.8)
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.2-43June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Intelligent TechnologiesMotor Control Center — Layout Form
Sheet 1313
Table 30.2-83. Arrangement of Structures (Numbered from Left to Right) Typical Dimensions: Indoor — 20-Inch (508.0 mm) W, 90-Inch (2286.0 mm) H; Outdoor 23.5-Inch (596.9 mm) W, 95.25-Inch (2419.4 mm) H
D – Future Space Only ø – Unusable Space
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
G G
H H
J J
K K
L L
M M
(STR#) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
Shipping Split
(When Desired)
Unit No.
Starter Class or Description
Size HMCP Feeder Breaker or Switch Amperes
hp Extra Intlks.
Control Devices NameplateIdentifications
Pushbutton Selector Switches
IndicatingLights
Meters
Sta
rt-S
top
Fw
d-R
ev-S
top
Fast-
Slo
w-S
top
Han
d-O
ff-A
uto
Fw
d-O
ff-R
ev-A
uto
Fast-
Off
-Slo
w-A
uto
Gre
en
(S
top
ped
)
Red
(R
un
, Fw
d, Fast)
Red
(R
ev. S
low
)
Pu
sh
-To
-Test
Ela
psed
Tim
e
NO NC
30.2-44
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 1314
NEMA is the registered trademark and service mark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trade-marks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Mass. UL is a federally registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Metasys is a regis-tered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. Siemens is a federally registered trademark of Siemens AG. Modbus is a registered trademark of Modicon, a division of Schneider Electric Industries SA. PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS International. Cutler-Hammer is a federally registered trademark of Eaton Corporation. Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont de Nemours and Company.
Recommended